ALHAMBRA
owner’s manual
Inglés S91551ABA20 (07.08) (GT9)
auto emoción
Alhambra Inglés (07.08)
auto emoción
S91551ABA20
Portada ALHAMBRA.qxd 10/9/08 12:18 Página 3
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com-
prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehículo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la
técnica. Por esta razón, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basándose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente
Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la información en el momento de la realización de la
impresión. Salvo error u omisión, la información recogida en el presente manual es válida en la fecha de cierre de su edición.
No está permitida la reimpresión, la reproducción o la traducción, total o parcial, sin la autorización escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos según la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificación.
;
Este papel está fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
© SEAT S.A. - Reimpresión: 15.09.08
Portada ALHAMBRA_interior.qxd 10/9/08 11:59 Página 1
Foreword
This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with
your vehicle.
Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will contribute to preserve its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts exchange.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the
vehicle.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 1 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 2 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Contents 3
Contents
The structure of this manual . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of child seats in vehicle seats . . . . .
Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display in the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On board computer with multifunction display .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key with remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and electrical sockets
AUX-IN Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning triangles and first aid kit . . . . .
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling and heating box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking distance warning system* . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gas emission control system . . . . . . . .
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
7
7
7
9
14
14
17
17
19
22
30
32
32
36
39
41
43
45
45
47
49
52
61
61
61
62
67
70
79
84
85
87
87
88
94
96
98
101
104
108
108
114
116
118
121
121
122
124
126
133
139
142
143
143
148
149
152
152
160
160
161
162
164
166
167
173
174
176
179
179
179
185
185
186
187
189
190
193
193
194
199
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 3 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Contents4
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . .
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tools*, spare wheel*, breakdown set* and
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown set* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation of anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sealing and inflating tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0l 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gear . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 85 kW (115 hp). Automatic
Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 bhp) 6 gear . . .
Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 bhp). Automatic
Petrol engine 2.8l VR6150 kW (204 bhp) 6 gear
Petrol engine 2.8l VR6 150 kW (204 bhp)
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.8l VR6150 kW (204 bhp) 6 gear
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 85 kW (115 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears.
Ecomotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
202
202
203
203
204
206
206
207
207
209
212
216
218
221
223
225
231
231
234
234
234
235
236
241
245
249
252
255
257
257
257
259
260
260
262
262
263
264
266
267
269
270
272
273
275
276
278
279
281
283
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 4 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
The structure of this manual 5
The structure of this manual
Before reading this manual it must be understood
This manual contains a description of the vehicle equipment at the time of
publication. Some of the equipment described here will not be available until
a later date, or is available only in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ALHAMBRA, some of the equipment
and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types
or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the
technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive adver-
tising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain
versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,
or else it is only on sale in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Even if the copyright symbol
does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.
The section is continued on the following page.
This shows the end of the section.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious
dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ-
ment.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 5 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Content6
Content
This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and
clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively
short sections making up chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire
manual is divided into five large parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable
climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Tips and Maintenance
Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain
problems which you may solve yourself.
4. Technical Data
Figures, data, dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consump-
tion) of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 6 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving 7
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and follow in the interest of your own
safety and the safety of your passengers.
WARNING
• This manual contains important information concerning the driver's
and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the vehicle
wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of for your
own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
• Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is a part of the occupant protection
system and can reduce the risk of injury during an accident.
Never “gamble” with your safety and the safety of your passengers. In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The
following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
• optimised three-point seat belts for all seats,
• seat belt tension devices for driver and passenger,
• Belt height adjustment for the front seats and outer seats in the second
row,
• frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
• side airbags for driver and passenger,
• curtain airbags,
• ISOFIX anchorage for ISOFIX child seats in the outside seats in the second
and third rows,
• Height-adjustable head restraints and
• adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and
your passengers with the best possible protection in accident situations. But
this safety equipment cannot help you or your passengers if you or your
passengers assume an incorrect sitting position or do not properly adjust or
use this equipment.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 7 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving8
Therefore, you have been provided with information about why this equip-
ment is so important, how it protects you, what you have to observe when
using it and how you and your passengers can achieve the greatest possible
benefit from the safety equipment fitted. This manual includes important
warnings that you and your passengers should observe in order to reduce the
risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
– Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
– Securely restrain all parcels ⇒ page 14.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your
size.
– Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to
their height.
– Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly
applied seat belts ⇒ page 45.
– Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers
also to assume a proper sitting position ⇒ page 9.
– Fasten your safety belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to
fasten their seat belts properly ⇒ page 17.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and
the personal behaviour of all occupants.
As driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected, you endanger
yourself as well as others on the road ⇒ , for this reason:
– Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic around you,
e.g. by passengers or telephone conversations.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 8 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving 9
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are under pres-
sure of time.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe
and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driver:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ fig. 1.
– Move the driver's seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
your knees still slightly angled ⇒ .
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ fig. 2.
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper
distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Proper head
restraint position for
driver
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 9 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving10
– Fasten your seat belt correctly ⇒ page 17.
– Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat ⇒ page 121.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
• Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel ⇒ page 9, fig. 1.
If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the
risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
• Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other
manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may
sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu-
vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag
system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt
properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting
position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest
possible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒ .
– Move the backrest to an upright position so that your back rests
completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ page 12.
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the front passenger seat.
– Fasten your seat belt correctly ⇒ page 17.
It is possible to deactivate the passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances ⇒ page 24.
Adjusting the front passenger's seat.
WARNING
• An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
• Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between
your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm,
the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 10 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving 11
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
• Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor-
rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event
of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could
sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
• To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden
braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection
when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is
wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to
the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the
belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the individual seats must sit up straight, keep
their feet in the footwells and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers in the individual seats must
observe the following:
– The backrest of the 3-seat seat bench must be in the upright
position and securely engaged in this position.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head.
– Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the individual seat.
– Fasten your safety belt securely.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children
in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the passengers on the individual seats are not sitting properly, they
could sustain severe injuries.
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
• The seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrests
are properly engaged in the upright position and the passengers are
wearing their seat belts properly. If passengers on the individual seats are
not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-
tioning of the belt web increases.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
observe the following:
– Adjust the headrest to the correct position.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 11 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving12
– Keep both feet in the foot well in front of the rear seat.
– Fasten your seat belt correctly ⇒ page 17.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take children
in the vehicle ⇒ page 45.
WARNING
• If the passengers on the rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
• Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
• Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when backrests are in an
upright position and the passengers are wearing their seat belts properly.
If passengers on the rear seat are not sitting in an upright position, the risk
of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases.
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 12 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving 13
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ page 12, fig. 3 and ⇒ page 12, fig. 4.
WARNING
• Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to
occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially
reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect belt web position. As the driver, you are
responsible for all vehicle occupants, especially children.
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be
dangerous for all occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to
make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
• Never stand in the vehicle,
• never stand on the seats,
• never kneel on the seats,
• never tilt your backrest far to the rear,
• never lean against the dash panel,
• never lie on the rear bench,
• never sit on the front edge of a seat,
• never sit sideways,
• never lean out of a window,
• never put your feet out of a window,
• never put your feet on the dash panel,
• never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
• never travel in a foot well,
• never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
• never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries
if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect
sitting position.
• Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main-
tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to
assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip
⇒ page 9, “Proper sitting position for occupants”.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 13 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving14
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must
never be impaired by objects or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened in the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be free to move further than
normal in order to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feel
for the pedals.
WARNING
• Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
• Never place objects in the driver foot well. An object could move into the
pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or
accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the foot well and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒ .
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
fied dealership.
WARNING
• If the pedals are obstructed, you could cause an accident. Risk of
serious injuries.
• Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
• Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor
mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk
of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 14 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving 15
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
– Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings ⇒ page 15.
WARNING
• Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can
cause serious injuries.
• Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
• Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of
fatal injury.
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style
accordingly, to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the
allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door
behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal
risk.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the
vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every
passenger must be properly belted in ⇒ page 17.
Note
• Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
• Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment
which can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings ⇒ in “Loading the
luggage compartment” on page 14.
– Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 15 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Safe driving16
The retainers for the detachable seat belts for the third row of seats and the
floor anchorings for the seats can be used as fastening rings for items of
luggage.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of “kinetic
energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with
inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event
of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward,
always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
• Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 16 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 17
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts
Introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Properly worn seat belts can save lives!
In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how
they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases.
• Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of
sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen-
gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
• Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use
seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe
injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Vehicles with five seats
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat.
The front seats and the outer rear seats are fitted with a three-point automatic
seat belt.
Vehicles with seven seats*
The vehicle has seven seats, two seats in the front, three seats in the second
row and two seats in the third row.
WARNING
• Never transport more people than there are seats available in the
vehicle.
• Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
– Fasten your safety belt securely.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 17 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts18
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before
driving off.
– Protect children by using child seats of the correct height for the
age of the child.
The warning lamp in the combi-instrument lights up if the driver seat belt
is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic
signal can also be heard for a couple of seconds.
The warning lamp*
does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened
while the ignition is switched on.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 18 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 19
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Why wear seat belts?
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy is generated.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving ⇒ fig. 5 there is a certain amount of
energy known as “kinetic energy”, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and passengers. The higher the speed and the greater
the weight, the more energy there is to be “released” in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
doubles from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases
by a factor of four.
Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the
entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
⇒ fig. 6.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
sion can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces
are even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a
frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their vehicle
Fig. 5 Vehicle about to hit
a wall: the occupants are
not wearing seatbelts
Fig. 6 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seatbelts
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 19 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts20
was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal
accidents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
Many people believe that the occupants can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with
the steering wheel, dashboard, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
⇒ fig. 7.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. When deployed,
airbags provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the
driver) must be wearing seat belts properly during the trip. This will reduce
the risk of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether
an airbag is fitted for the seat.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ⇒ fig. 8.
Fig. 7 A driver not
wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently.
Fig. 8 The unbelted rear
passenger is thrown
forward violently, hitting
the driver wearing a seat
belt.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 20 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 21
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seat belts protect
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk
of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown properly worn seat belts to be an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious
accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
airbag trigger threshold in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your
passengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety notes on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can reduce the risk of
injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this booklet.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not
damaged.
WARNING
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only
if you use them properly.
Fig. 9 Driver wearing the
seat belt properly: is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 21 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts22
• Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That
applies also to your front and rear passengers – danger of injury!
• The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi-
tioned correctly.
• Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
• Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the
vehicle is in motion.
• Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
• The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
• The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
• Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
• Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
• Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
• The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other
objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
• Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter
the position of the belt webbing.
• Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors
or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci-
dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
• Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be
replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there
is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
• The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly.
Seat belts
Fastening seat belt (one buckle)
The seat belts on the front seats and the seats in the second
and third row are fastened using one buckle.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Fig. 10 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 22 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 23
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap ⇒ .
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ page 22, fig. 10.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
Every seat belt is equipped with an automatic belt retractor on the shoulder
belt. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
• The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the
seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
• If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her
properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe
injuries.
Fastening seat belts (with two buckles)
The seat belt for the centre seat in the second row of seats is
fastened using two buckles.
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– Pull the belt so that the tongue ⇒ fig. 11 is pulled down.
– Insert latch plate into the buckle belonging to the seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click.
– Use latch plate of the belt to pull the belt across your lap.
– Insert latch plate into the buckle belonging to seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click.
– Pull the belt to ensure that both latch plates are securely
engaged in the buckles.
Fig. 11 Fastening the
seat belt on the centre
seat in the second row of
seats
A
1
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
2
A
B
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 23 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts24
The seat belt for the centre seat in the second row of seats has a belt retractor
fitted in the car roof. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel
in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on
the seat belt is locked.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
• The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the
seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
• If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her
properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe
injuries.
Note
An illustration of how to fasten the seat belts can be found on each buckle.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are
properly positioned.
Fig. 12 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct belt web
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 24 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 25
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
• Belt height adjustment for the front seats and the outer seats in the
second row,
• front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder,
never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the
torso
• The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the
stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull
the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 22.
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnancy.
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the belt web
is properly positioned ⇒ page 24.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ page 9.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and
as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ fig. 14.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the corresponding seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
⇒ .
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
Fig. 14 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 25 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts26
WARNING
• An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event
of an accident.
• For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
• Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 21.
Belt height adjustment
Using the height adjusters for the front seats and the outer
seats in the second row the position of the seat belts can be
adjusted in the shoulder area according to the height of the
occupant.
The seat belt adjustment for the front seats and the outer seats in
the second row can be used to adjust the proper belt web position
at the shoulder.
– Press the upper part ⇒ fig. 15 of the shoulder belt guide in the
direction of the arrow and hold it in this position.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have the seat
belt in a position suitable for your size.
– Release the shoulder belt guide.
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Unfastening seatbelt (with one buckle)
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Fig. 15 Location of the
belt height adjuster
Fig. 16 Removing latch
plate from buckle
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 26 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 27
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press the red button on the belt buckle ⇒ page 26, fig. 16. The
latch plate is released and springs out. ⇒
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
will not be damaged.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Unfastening seat belts (with two buckles)
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
– Press the red button in the belt buckle ⇒ fig. 17 . The latch
plate is released and springs out.
– Press the red button in the belt buckle . The latch plate is
released and springs out.
– Guide the belt back by hand holding both latches so that the belt
rolls up easily without damaging the trim.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Fig. 17 Unfastening seat
belt with two buckles
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 27 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts28
Detachable seat belts
The seat belts in the third row of seats can be detached.
Detaching the seat belt
– Push the the spring hook ⇒ fig. 18 in the direction of the arrow
and remove the hook by pulling down.
– Guide the seat belt with the spring hook up and hang the spring
hook in the retainer ⇒ fig. 19 -arrow- in the side trim.
Fitting the seat belt
– Remove the spring hook from the retainer and guide the seat belt
down.
– Fir the hook and pull it up until the spring hook functions again
⇒ .
Remove the spring hook again if the seat belt is twisted after it has been
fitted. Turn it in the appropriate direction and reengage the spring hook
securely.
WARNING
Pull on the seat belt to ensure that the hook is engaged properly. The hook
could disengage itself whilst the vehicle is in motion if it has not been
properly fitted - Risk of fatal injury!
Fig. 18 Retainer with
spring hook for the
detachable seat belt
Fig. 19 Storage for the
detached seat belt
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 28 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 29
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Belt retainer*
WARNING
• When the belt for the outer seats in the centre row is removed insert the
webbing behind the guide of the side trim ⇒ fig. 20, in order to lower the
backrest without damaging the webbing.
• The seat belts must be removed from the holder before removing the
individual seats. This means that the belts will not be damaged.
Belt height adjustment
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the position
of the seat belt at the shoulder.
The seat belt adjustment for the front seats and the outer seats in
the second row can be used to adjust the proper belt web position
at the shoulder.
– Press the upper part ⇒ fig. 21 of the shoulder belt guide in the
direction of the arrow and hold it in this position.
– Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt to the correct position
– After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Fig. 20 Belt retainer for
outer seats in centre row
Fig. 21 Location of the
belt height adjuster
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 29 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts30
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. This is particularly true of seat belts with two buckles.
The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order described in this
chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs substantially the
protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a
deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has assumed an incorrect
sitting position. As driver, you are responsible for the safety of all
vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
– Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒ .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them during the trip.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of seat belts ⇒ page 22 and ⇒ page 27.
Belt tension devices
Function of the belt tension device
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices.
Sensors will trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on, lateral
and rear collisions only if the seat belt is being worn. This retracts and
tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt tension device can be triggered only once.
The belt tension devices will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns, or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
• If the belt tension devices are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and is no indication that there was a fire in the vehicle.
• The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
these regulations and will be pleased to pass on the information to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension devices
The belt tension devices are components of the seat belts that are installed
in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension devices or remove
and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 30 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seat belts 31
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension
devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases.
The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong
circumstances.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt
tension devices or seat belts.
• The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor
cannot be repaired.
• Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the
removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work,
must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
• The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident
and must be changed it they have been activated.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 31 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system32
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before you drive:
– Always wear the seat belt properly ⇒ page 17.
– Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly ⇒ page 9.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly ⇒ page 10.
– Adjust the head restraint seat correctly ⇒ page 12.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle ⇒ page 45.
The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you
have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could
sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain
a correct sitting position while travelling.
Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not
wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the
occupant. This applies particularly to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle following an accident, for whatever reason, are not an
indication as to why the airbags were triggered.
WARNING
• Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi-
tion can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
• All occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can
sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. You should always
transport all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or
assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased
substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you
are struck by an inflating airbag.
• To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly ⇒ page 17.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 32 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system 33
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Always properly adjust the front seats.
Conditions for fitting a rear facing childseat in the front
passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child ⇒ . The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child
if you transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always trans-
port all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the
front and side airbags for the front passenger ⇒ page 43 can be disabled
with the ignition key. When transporting children, use a child seat appro-
priate to the age and size of each child.
WARNING
If a child seat is mounted in the front passenger seat, the child is exposed
to a greater risk in theevent of an accident.
• Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju-
ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
• An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat
and hurl it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest.
• If, under special circumstances, it should be necessary to transport a
child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely
essential that you observe the following safety measures:
− Disabling front and side airbags for front passenger ⇒ page 43.
− The child seat must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
− Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer
and absolutely observe the warnings ⇒ page 45.
− Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat all the way to the rear so that the greatest possible distance to the
front passenger airbag is ensured.
− Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
− The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright
position.
Warning lamp for airbag and belt tensioner system
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension
device system.
The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the
vehicle, including control units and wiring connections.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 33 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system34
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly
monitored electronically. The warning lamp
will light up for four seconds
every time the ignition is switched on (selfdiagnosis).
If at least one airbag has been deactivated in a specialised workshop, the
warning light
flashes for 12 seconds before starting the engine. This does
not apply when the front and side airbags have been deactivated using the
key switch ⇒ page 43.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp
:
• does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
• does not go off after four seconds, after switching on the ignition,
• goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
• or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, an appropriate fault message
appears in the display
1)
of the instrument panel. In this event, you should
have a qualified workshop check the system immediately.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot
properly perform its protective function.
• If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by
a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or
may not be triggered correctly.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the
airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
Vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
• If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used
incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may
fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
• Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the soft
plastic surface of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dashboard,
and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.
• It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth
or one moistened with water. Never clean the dash panel and surface of the
airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the
surface to become porous. If the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic
parts can cause substantial injuries.
• Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
• Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag
components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should
be performed only by a qualified workshop. Qualified workshops have the
necessary tools, repair information and qualified personnel.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 34 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system 35
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
• Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 35 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system36
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 22 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ⇒ fig. 23.
Airbags are identified by the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a
severe frontal collision ⇒ page 37.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the airbags
can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the warning lamp
• does not come on when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 33,
• does not go off after four seconds, after switching on the ignition,
• goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
• or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
Fig. 22 Driver airbag
located in steering wheel
Fig. 23 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 36 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system 37
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a minor frontal collision,
• during a minor side collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• or if the vehicle rolls.
WARNING
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly.
• If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
Function of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
The airbag system is designed so that the front airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
deploy in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 24. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. Once the impact has been
absorbed, the airbag deflates sufficiently for the front occupants to see
forward.
Fig. 24 Inflated front
airbags
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 37 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system38
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags deploy. The airbag covers remain connected to
the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Safety notes on front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
When the front airbags are triggered they fill the zones marked in red (radius
of action). Therefore additional accessories should never be placed in these
areas ⇒ ,
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags deploy. The airbag covers remain connected to
the steering wheel or the dash panel.
WARNING
• It is important that the driver keeps at a minimum of 25 cm from the
steering wheel It is important that the passenger moves the seat back as
far as possible, to keep a safe distance away from the instrument panel.
Failure to respect the minimum distance means that the airbag will not
protect you. Risk of fatal injury. In addition, the front seats and head
restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occu-
pant.
• If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or
assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased
substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you
are struck by an inflating airbag.
• Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint
system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain
serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 45.
• Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any
objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or
allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
• Nothing should be placed on the windscreen area above the passenger
side airbag, for example notebooks or telephone holders. If the airbag is
activated, these objects may fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior
and could cause injury.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 38 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system 39
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Side airbags
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat back-
rests ⇒ fig. 25.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat
occupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision ⇒ page 40, “Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system”.
In a side collision the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their
normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
hold the passengers on the front seats in a position where the side airbags
can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
The side airbag system will not be triggered
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a minor side collision,
• during a minor frontal collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• or if the vehicle rolls.
The main parts of the airbag system are
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front seats,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
• The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the
occupants are seated correctly.
• If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a side collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
Fig. 25 Side airbag in left
rear seat
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 39 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system40
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
Correct behaviour considerably reduces the risk of injury.
WARNING
• If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury
should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
• Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the
backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case the side
airbags would not be triggered.
• Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the
driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side
of the backrest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
• Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the
side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose them-
selves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is
particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical
consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 45.
• Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may
be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 40 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system 41
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
⇒ fig. 26 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision ⇒ page 39.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only
because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
• an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
• the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front
passenger and passengers on the rear seats,
• a warning lamp in the dash panel insert.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered
• if the ignition is switched off,
• during a frontal collision,
• during a rear-end collision,
• if the vehicle rolls,
• during a minor side collision,
WARNING
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked imme-
diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a
collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Fig. 26 Location of left
curtain airbag
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 41 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system42
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
of the vehicle ⇒ fig. 27.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain bag covers the side windows and door pillars.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
• In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
• For safety reasons, the head air bag must be disconnected in those
vehicles fitted with a passenger compartment separation screen. See an
Authorised Service Centre to make this adjustment.
• There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu-
pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags
so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side
windows.
• The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. When using the
coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
• The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been
deployed they must be replaced.
• Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining)
should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may
be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
Fig. 27 Deployed curtain
airbags
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 42 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system 43
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
• The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the
interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and
head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in
any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way,
this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on
the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger front and side airbags
The passenger airbags must be disconnected when a rear
facing child seat is fitted in the front passenger seat.
The key switch can be used to disconnect the front and side airbag
for the passenger seat. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain
functional.
Disabling front and side airbags for front passenger
–Switch off ignition.
– Open centre compartment on instrument panel.
– Using the ignition key, turn the switch to OFF ⇒ fig. 28.
– Check if, when the ignition is switched on, that the warning lamp
“PASS AIRBAG OFF” on the instrument panel ⇒ fig. 29 remains lit
⇒ .
– Close centre compartment on instrument panel:
Enabling front and side airbags for front passenger
–Switch off ignition.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 28 Interior of centre
compartment on instru-
ment panel: Key switch for
switching off the front
passenger airbags
Fig. 29 Warning lamp for
disabling airbag in dash
panel
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 43 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Airbag system44
– Open centre compartment on instrument panel.
– Using the ignition key, turn the switch to ON ⇒ page 43, fig. 28.
– Check if, when the ignition is switched on, that the warning lamp
“PASS AIRBAG OFF” on the instrument panel ⇒ page 43, fig. 29
does not light up ⇒ .
– Close centre compartment on instrument panel.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
• You should only disable the front and side passenger airbags if, in
exceptional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat ⇒ page 45.
• Never fit a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child faces back-
wards to the direction of travel and the frontal airbag has not been deacti-
vated. This is highly dangerous for the child. However, if it is necessary in
exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on
the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger
airbag.
• As soon as the child seat will no longer be used on the front passenger
seat, enable the front and side passenger airbag again.
• Only deactivate the front and side passenger airbag when the ignition
is off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create the
risk of the front, curtain or side airbag not deploying properly or not at all
in the event of an accident.
• If, while the front and side passenger airbag are turned off, the indi-
cator PASS. AIRBAG OFF does not remain lit, this could indicate a fault in
the airbag system:
− Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work-
shop.
− Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front and
side passenger airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the
fault.
− It is impossible to determine whether the front or side airbags will be
triggered in case of accident. Inform your passengers of this.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 44 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 45
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear
seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or
the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For
safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of
the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to
children just as much as adults ⇒ page 19. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children
are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by “Peke”
2)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
⇒ page 45.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats.
– Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never fit a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child faces back-
wards to the direction of travel and the frontal airbag has not been deacti-
vated. This is highly dangerous for the child. If it is necessary, in excep-
2)
Not for all countries
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 45 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety46
tional circumstances, to transport a child on the front passenger seat,
always disable the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 43.
• All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while travelling.
• Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child!
• Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly
secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,
the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries
to themselves and other occupants.
• If children assume an improper sitting position when the car is moving,
they expose themselves to greater risk of injury during a sudden braking
manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is trav-
elling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an
accident; this could have consequences including serious injury or death.
• A suitable child seat can protect your child!
• Make sure that no hard or sharp objects, for example toys, are on the
child seats. Risk of injury.
• Never leave a child unsupervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.
• Depending on the time of year, the interior of a parked vehicle can reach
extreme temperatures which may endanger the life of people and animals.
• Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat
belt without a child restraint system, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident.
• Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
on any sharp edges.
• Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision
or sudden braking manoeuvres.
• The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi-
tioned correctly.
• Only one child may occupy a child seat.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 46 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 47
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R means: Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration ⇒ fig. 30.
Group 0+: For babies from about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats ⇒ page 45.
Fig. 30 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 47 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety48
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Child seats using the “ISOFIX” system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of
child seats
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
protected by group 2 child seats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat
belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
metres tall are best protected by seat cushions with head restraints in
conjunction with properly worn seat belts ⇒ fig. 32.
Fig. 31 A category 1
forward-facing child seat
fitted on the rear seat.
Fig. 32 Forward-facing
child seat installed on rear
seat.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 48 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 49
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre
of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie
close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across
the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take
up any slack ⇒ page 22, “Seat belts”.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ page 45.
Installation of child seats in vehicle seats
General notes
The correct fitting of child seats in the different seats is described below.
Child restraint systems that have been checked according to ECE-R 44 are
suitable for installation on the front passenger seat or on the rear seats.
Note
The passenger seat and the rear seats comply with directive 77/541 EEC for
the installation of child restraint systems.
Front passenger seat
Only the use of an officially approved child seat corre-
sponding to the weight and height of the child is permitted.
Universal seats for children in groups 0, 0+, 1, 2, or 3 (⇒ page 52) ⇒ can
be fitted in the passenger seat.
To fit a child seat, position the seat in the upright position and move the
passenger seat as far back as possible. The seat must be in the highest posi-
tion
3)
on vehicles with a height-adjustable ⇒ front passenger seat.
WARNING
• Never fit a child seat in the passenger seat, where the child faces back-
wards to the direction of travel and the frontal airbag has not been deacti-
vated. This is highly dangerous for the child. If it is necessary in excep-
tional cases to transport a child on the front passenger seat, you must
always disable the front and side passenger airbags ⇒ page 43.
• Children must travel in a child seat appropriate to their weight and
height.
• The vehicle seat must always be fitted in the direction of travel when
securing child restraint systems in weight class 0 or 0+.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ in “Safety notes on using child seats” on page 45.
• Please always read and follow the information and warnings provided
by the child seat manufacturer.
3)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 49 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety50
Outer seats in the second row of seats and seats in the third
row of seats
Only the use of an officially approved child seat corre-
sponding to the weight and height of the child is permitted.
In the outer seats of seats in the second and third row universal child seats
for groups 0, 0+, 1, 2, or 3 (⇒ page 52) ⇒ may be fitted.
Seat with ISOFIX retainers
These seats are suitable for ISOFIX child seats specially designed for this type
of vehicle in accordance with regulation ECE-R 44 ⇒ .
Vehicle seat with integrated child seat
Universal child restraint systems for any group can be fitted to this seat if the
integrated child seat ⇒ page 52, “Integrated child seat” is not used ⇒ .
WARNING
• Children must travel in a child seat appropriate to their weight and
height.
• The vehicle seat must always be fitted in the direction of travel when
securing child restraint systems in weight class 0 or 0+.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ in “Safety notes on using child seats” on page 45.
• Please always read and follow the information and warnings provided
by the child seat manufacturer.
Note
• Due to space limitation, only the two outer seats can be used if two ISOFIX
system seats are to be fitted in the second row of seats.
Centre seat in the second row of seats (with three-point roof-
anchored belt)
Only the use of an officially approved child seat corre-
sponding to the weight and height of the child is permitted.
The centre seat with the three-point roof-anchored belt is suitable for weight
classes 0 to 2 ⇒ .
Seat with ISOFIX retainers
Child seats fitted with the ISOFIX system can be used on the centre seat if it
is equipped with ISOFIX retainers ⇒ .
WARNING
The central seat with three-point roof anchored belt is not suited to
universal child seats in group 3.
• The vehicle seat must always be fitted in the direction of travel when
securing child restraint systems in weight class 0 or 0+.
• Children must travel in a child seat appropriate to their weight and
height.
• Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒ in “Safety notes on using child seats” on page 45.
• Please always read and follow the information and warnings provided
by the child seat manufacturer.
Note
• Due to space limitations, no further ISOFIX restraint systems can be fitted
in the second row of seats once an ISOFIX system has been fitted to the centre
seat.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 50 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 51
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
ISOFIX child seat mounting system
ISOFIX child seats can be mounted in the second and third
row seats quickly, safely and easily.
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
– Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings ⇒ fig. 33
(arrows) until the child seat can be heard to engage securely.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
When a child seat is mounted in seats equipped with the “ISOFIX” system,
the backrest should be fitted in one of two positions ⇒ fig. 34 or .
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are secured to the body behind the seats in the
second and third rows. The ISOFIX retaining rings are attached to the seat
frames.
Child seats with ISOFIX mountings are available from Authorised SEAT Service
Centres.
WARNING
• The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX child seats.
• Never secure retaining belts, objects or non-ISOFIX child seats to the
fastening rings. Risk of fatal accidents.
Fig. 33 Retaining rings
for ISOFIX child seats in
the frames of the outer
seats in the second row of
seats
Fig. 34 Backrest adjust-
ment when using ISOFIX
child seats
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 51 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety52
Integrated child seat
Basic information on the integrated child seat
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
It can be adjusted to suit the child's size and is suitable for children in the
following groups according to the ECE-R 44 norm: Group 1 (9 - 18 Kg), Group
2 (15 - 25 kg) and Group 3 (22 - 36 kg).
The integrated child seat for children in the Groups 1 and 2 must be used
with the slumber roll delivered with the seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that the child seat for children in Group 1
is installed facing against the direction of travel. To do this, simply remove
the seat and fit it again facing in the opposite direction. The child must be
fastened in using the harness belt.
The child seat may only be fitted in the direction of travel for children in
Groups 2 and 3 who are fastened in using the three-point belt fitted in the
vehicle.
WARNING
• With the integrated child seat, the backrest may only be adjusted to the
first or second backrest position for children in Groups 1 to 3.
• The slumber roll must always be fitted for children in Groups 1 and 2.
• The integrated child seat must not be modified in any way.
• Do not allow the belt webbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
on any sharp edges.
• If the child seat or any parts of the seat are damaged, or if the child seat
has to withstand the force of a collision in an accident, the seat, or part of
the seat, must be replaced - preferably by a qualified dealership.
Group 1 integrated child seat
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Setting up the child seat
– Pull the loop to the front in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 35
.
– Push the seat cushion in direction of the arrow until it
engages in position.
– Pull the loop to fold down the child seat cushion in direction
of arrow .
Restoring the normal seat
– First fold the child seat cushion up.
Fig. 35 Using the inte-
grated child seat
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 52 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 53
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Pull the loop in the direction of the arrow and push the seat
cushion down until it engages.
Fitting the slumber roll
– Remove the head restraint.
– Fit the head restraint onto the slumber roll.
– Reinsert the head restraint and push down until it can be heard
to engage.
Removing the slumber roll
– Remove the head restraint.
– Pull the slumber roll off the head restraint.
– Reinsert the head restraint and push down until it can be heard
to engage.
For safety reasons, we recommend that the child seat for children in Group 1
is installed facing against the direction of travel.
Adjusting the belt routing for larger children in Group 1
A correctly adjusted seat belt helps to protect your child!
– Pull the upper part ⇒ fig. 36 of the support off the Velcro
fasteners to the front.
– For larger children, guide the two shoulder belts in the side slots
to the upper position .
– Then push the support under the belts and secure it ⇒ .
For smaller children, guide the two belts in the side slots to the lower position
.
WARNING
The support ⇒ fig. 36 must be pressed onto the seat in the area of the
Velcro fastener in such a way that the belts can move freely in the slots.
A
1
Fig. 36 Integrated child
seats. adjusting the belt
routing
A
A
A
6
A
A
A
7
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 53 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety54
Fastening the harness belt for children in Group 1
A correctly adjusted seat belt helps to protect your child!
– Sit the child so that its bottom is as far back on the seat as
possible.
– Place the belt to the right and left over the child's shoulders.
– Push the belt lock element ⇒ fig. 37 with the tongue through
the other lock element .
– Insert both elements with the tongue at the front into the lock
until they click into place. (Pull to ensure they are securely
engaged!)
– Make sure that the protective cushion is always underneath
the belt lock .
– Pull the upper part of the harness belt ⇒ fig. 38 down in the
direction of the arrow until the belt fits firmly against the body of
the child.
WARNING
The harness belt must always fit firmly against the body of the child (even
with thick or winter clothing) so that the child seat can provide the
maximum amount of protection possible.
Fig. 37 Integrated child
seats. closing harness
belt
Fig. 38 Integrated child
seats. adjusting harness
belt
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
E
A
D
A
1
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 54 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 55
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Releasing the harness belt for children in Group 1
A correctly adjusted seat belt helps to protect your child!
– Press and hold the release button ⇒ fig. 39 in the direction
of the arrow.
– With the release button pressed, pull the lower part of the
harness belt down in the direction of the arrow.
Group 2 integrated child seat
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Setting up the child seat
– Pull the loop to the front in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 40
.
– Push the seat cushion in direction of the arrow until it
engages in position.
– Remove the head restraint out of the backrest of the integrated
child seat and replace the head restraint together with the
slumber roll .
Fastening the three-point belt
– Guide the shoulder part of the belt underneath the slumber roll.
Fig. 39 Integrated child
seats. adjusting harness
belt
A
2
A
3
Fig. 40 Integrated child
seats. lift up the cushion
A
1
A
2
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 55 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety56
– To fasten the three-point belt, take hold of the tongue and pull it
slowly across the chest and lap.
– Push the tongue of the belt into the lock for that seat so that it
engages audibly (pull to check!)
– Adjust the three-point belt to suit body size ⇒ .
Restoring the normal seat
– Pull the loop in the direction of the arrow and push the seat
cushion down until it engages.
Removing the slumber roll
– Remove the head restraint.
– Pull the slumber roll off the head restraint.
– Reinsert the head restraint and push down until it can be heard
to engage.
Use the following measures to guarantee the proper routing of the shoulder
belt:
• Seatbelt height setting
• Adjustment of the seat forwards and backwards
• Backrest angle adjustment
WARNING
• For safety reasons, the seat for children in Group 2 may only be fitted in
the direction of travel and in one of the outer positions (not on the centre
seat).
• The risk of injury is increased if the belt is not correctly routed.
• The shoulder part of the belt should be positioned roughly over the
centre of the shoulder, never across the neck, and fit closely against the
upper part of the body.
• The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and
always fit closely. check the fitting of the belt.
Group 3 integrated child seat
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Setting up the child seat
– Pull the loop to the front in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 41
.
A
1
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 41 Using the inte-
grated child seat
A
1
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 56 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety 57
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Push the seat cushion in direction of the arrow until it
engages in position.
Fastening the three-point belt
– To fasten the three-point belt, take hold of the tongue and pull it
slowly across the chest and lap.
– Push the tongue of the belt into the lock for that seat so that it
engages audibly (pull to check!).
– Adjust the three-point belt to suit body size ⇒ .
Restoring the normal seat
– Pull the loop in the direction of the arrow and push the seat
cushion down until it engages.
Use the following measures to guarantee the proper routing of the shoulder
belt:
• Seatbelt height setting
• Adjustment of the seat forwards and backwards
• Backrest angle adjustment
WARNING
• For safety reasons, the seat for children in Group 3 may only be fitted in
the direction of travel and in one of the outer positions (not on the centre
seat).
• The risk of injury is increased if the belt is not correctly routed.
• The shoulder part of the belt should be positioned roughly over the
centre of the shoulder, never across the neck, and fit closely against the
upper part of the body.
• The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and
always fit closely. check the fitting of the belt.
Cleaning the child seat
– Open the zip ⇒ fig. 42 fully and undo it at the end.
– Pull the cover from the Velcro fastening in area .
– Guide the belt lock and the harness belts through the cover and
remove the child seat cover.
The child seat cover can be washed in a washing machine at a maximum
temperature of 30°C.
A
2
A
1
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 42 Section of inte-
grated child seat
A
A
A
B
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 57 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Child safety58
WARNING
When refitting the child seat cover, please ensure that the cover is fitted to
the seat in the area of the Velcro fastening in such a way that the belts can
move freely in the slots.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 58 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
59
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 59 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
60
Fig. 43 Instrument panel
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 60 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 61
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric wing mirror adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric window control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument lighting control / Headlamp range control . . . . . . .
Air outlets
main beam and turn signal light lever/ Cruise control* / . . . . .
Instrument panel / warning lights / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn / Driver's airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches for:
− rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− windscreen heater* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− left seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio
Cup holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central upper stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches for:
− hazard warning light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− PDC* (parking distance control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− right seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− cover for supplementary switch
Glove box/Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger side upper stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ash tray/ lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric side window controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals
Steering control adjustment lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusebox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
• Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
• In versions with the steering wheel on the right, the layout of the control
elements is somewhat different. But the symbols assigned to the controls
A
1
92
A
2
119
A
3
101
A
4
109
A
5
109
A
6
A
7
111, 176
A
8
62, 70
A
9
36
A
10
162
A
11
116
A
12
115
115
125
182
A
13
152
A
14
A
15
136
A
16
134
A
17
110
174
125
A
18
134
A
19
36
A
20
133
A
21
166
A
22
139
A
23
101
A
24
173
A
25
A
26
160
A
27
241
A
28
211
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 61 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit62
correspond to the symbols used in the versions with the steering wheel on
the left
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Rev counter ⇒ page 63
Engine coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 63
Display in the combi-instrument
4)
and warning lamps ⇒ page 70
4)
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 64
Speedometer
Engine oil temperature gauge
4)
⇒ page 65
Clock ⇒ page 65
Setting knob for the clock
Adjust kilometre button
Odometer (total mileage / trip recorder) ⇒ page 65
Voltmeter
4)
⇒ page 65
Fig. 44 Detailed view of dash panel instrument panel
4)
Optional equipment
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 62 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 63
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
If, for example, the needle is directly over the 2, this corresponds to an engine
speed of 2000 rpm (revolutions per minute) ⇒ page 62, fig. 44 .
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed
which may be used briefly when the engine is warm and after it has been run
in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector
lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the
red zone.
Caution
The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine
noise.
Engine coolant temperature display
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
The display only works when the ignition is switched on. The symbol
will also light up in the display for some seconds as a function
check.
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads ⇒ fig. 45 .
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions, the needle should be in the middle section of
the scale. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard,
especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern, as long
as the warning lamp does not light up ⇒ page 70.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp will light up if the needle is in the warning zone. The
warning text
5)
STOP CHECK COOLANT SERVICE MANUAL may also appear in
A
1
Fig. 45 Instrument panel:
engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge
A
A
A
2
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
9
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 63 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit64
the combi-instrument display. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Allow
the engine to cool and check the coolant level ⇒ .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
Read and observe the warnings “Working in the engine compartment”
before opening the bonnet to carry out work in the engine compartment.
Caution
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 70 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone ⇒ fig. 46 -arrow-, the warning
lamp lights up in the display. The text
6)
PLEASE REFUEL may appear in the
combi-instrument display. At the same time, an audible warning is given as a
reminder to fill up. At this point there are still about 8 litres of fuel in the
tank.
5)
Depending on model version
6)
Depending on model version
F ig. 4 6 I nst ru men t p an el:
fuel gauge
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 64 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 65
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Engine oil temperature display
Do not drive at full throttle if the temperature gauge indicates that the oil in
the engine is still cold. The engine revs should be reduced if the pointer goes
into the red area ⇒ fig. 47 -arrow-. The needle must then return to the normal
zone.
If the pointer remains in the red zone, switch off the engine and check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is correct and the oil pressure warning lamp
does not start flashing when the engine is started, you can drive on to the
nearest qualified dealer, but do not run the engine at high speeds.
Setting the clock
The setting knob is located beneath the rev counter.
Setting the hour
– Turn the setting knob ⇒ page 62, fig. 44 briefly in an anti-
clockwise direction to move the hour forward by one hour or
– turn and hold the setting knob in an anti-clockwise direction to
move the hour forward more quickly.
Setting the minutes
– Turn the setting knob briefly in a clockwise direction to set the
clock forward by one minute or
– Turn and hold the setting knob in a clockwise direction to set the
minutes forward more quickly.
Mileage display
The top counter of the mileage display ⇒ page 62, fig. 44 registers the
total mileage covered by the vehicle.
The lower counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates steps
of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset button
⇒ page 62, fig. 44 .
Voltmeter
The voltmeter ⇒ page 62, fig. 44 indicates the voltage of the vehicle elec-
trical system. The voltage of the electrical system should normally be
Fig. 47 Engine oil
temperature gauge
A
8
A
10
A
9
A
11
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 65 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit66
between 12 and 15 volts. If the voltage drops below 12 volts when the engine
is running, you should have the power supply (battery and alternator)
checked by a qualified dealership.
Note
The voltage may drop below 8 volts while the engine is being started.
Service Interval Display
The service display is shown either on the mileage display ⇒ page 62, fig. 44
or in the display
7)
in the combi-instrument ⇒ page 62, fig. 44 .
Service warning
A service pre-warning will appear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A
spanner symbol
appears in the display along with the miles and the
number of kilometres until the next service. The service message will disap-
pear approximately 20 seconds after the ignition is switched on or if the
engine is running.
The distance quoted to the next scheduled service is reduced in increments
of 100 miles.
The following information text displayed in the instrument panel display:
SERVICE IN... KM OR SERVICE IN... DAYS. The service message will disappear
approximately 20 seconds after the ignition is switched on or the engine is
running. The normal display can be resumed by pressing the reset button on
the trip counter or by pressing the rocker switch of the windscreen wiper lever
.
If a service is due, a gong signal will sound and the flashing “spanner”
symbol will appear for approximately 20 seconds. The following information
text displayed in the instrument panel display: SERVICE NOW.
With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by
pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
information.
Resetting the service display
The display is reset by the SEAT dealer after the service has been carried out.
You will receive a print-out from the SEAT dealership as confirmation that this
work has been carried out.
If the service is not carried out by a SEAT Service centre, the service interval
display will have to be reset manually as follows:
• Switch off ignition.
• Press and hold the reset knob for the trip meter.
• Turn the ignition on and turn the reset button to the right. The display will
return to the normal mode.
Note
• The next service will be displayed after 15,000 km (10,000 miles) if you
reset the service display yourself. The service interval will not be determined
individually.
• Do not reset the display between service intervals as the display will
otherwise be incorrect.
7)
Optional equipment
A
10
A
3
A
B
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 66 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 67
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Display in the instrument panel
Fault messages
Faults are shown by warning lamps and / or as symbols with
warning and information reports on the display.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional problems are
shown by warning lamps and / or red or yellow symbols with fault texts on the
combi-instrument. Depending on the exact nature of the functional problem,
audible warnings may also be given.
Note
• The size of the display depends on the type of combi-instrument you have
fitted. In some models, the combi-instrument does not have an integrated
display.
• In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive informa-
tion in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Overview of selected fault messages
Fault messages are displayed on the combi-instrument display.
The following overview does not show all fault messages. Not all fault
messages are displayed with a symbol.
Warning symbols (priority 1)
If the symbol lights up again after a fault has been corrected, you should stop
the vehicle immediately, switch off the engine and seek professional advice.
Fault message Symbol Action
STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL
Stop the car, turn the engine off and check the brake fluid level ⇒ page 221
HANDBRAKE ON
Release the handbrake.
STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL
and
Stop the car, turn the engine off and seek professional help ⇒ page 179
STOP CHECK COOLANT SERVICE MANUAL
Checking coolant level ⇒ page 216
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 67 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit68
Information symbols (priority 2)
STOP OIL PRESSURE ENGINE OFF SERVICE MANUAL
Stop the car, turn the engine off and check the brake fluid level ⇒ page 214
ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP!
Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible and have the
alternator checked.
FASTEN SEATBELT
Fasten your seat belt correctly; and make sure your passengers are also
properly belted in ⇒ page 17
Fault message Symbol Action
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level and top up with the right engine oil. ⇒ page 214
OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP
Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible and
have the engine checked.
STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL
Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible and have the
ABS checked.
PLEASE REFUEL
Refuel as soon as possible.
TOP UP WASHER FLUID
Fill up with water and washer fluid.
CHECK BRAKE PADS
Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop immediately and have the brake
pads checked.
EXHAUST WORKSHOP
Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible and
have the engine checked.
ENGINE FAULT CONSULT WORKSHOP
or
Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible and
have the engine checked.
AIRBAG FAULT
Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop immediately and have the airbag
system checked.
Fault message Symbol Action
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 68 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 69
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Fault message priorities
Priority 1 fault messages (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings ⇒ . This is a danger warning.
Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. The symbols will
keep flashing until the faults have been rectified.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
report.
Priority 2 fault messages (yellow):
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time.
Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
reports have been dealt with!
WARNING
Failure to observe fault texts and warning lamps can result in serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 69 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit70
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
Airbag ⇒ page 33
Trailer turn signals* ⇒ page 72
Cruise control ⇒ page 73
Operate the foot brake ⇒ page 73
Rear fog light ⇒ page 73
Fig. 48 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of
the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on
certain models/model years or are optional extras.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 70 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 71
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If lit: preheating system active.
If flashing: there is a fault in the engine management (die-
sel engines). Contact a specialist workshop.
⇒ page 73
Turn signals ⇒ page 73
Engine fault (petrol engine) ⇒ page 73
Main beam headlights ⇒ page 73
Fault in the emission control system ⇒ page 74
Traction control system TCS ⇒ page 74
Electronic Stabilising Program* (ESP) ⇒ page 74
Anti-lock brake system ABS ⇒ page 74
Diesel particulate filter ⇒ page 75
Brakes/Handbrake ⇒ page 76
Alternator ⇒ page 76
Seat belt warning lamp* ⇒ page 17
Fuel reserve ⇒ page 76
Fault in lights* ⇒ page 76
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
A
11
A
12
A
13
A
14
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
18
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 71 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit72
WARNING
• Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a
warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your
stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.
• The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area!
Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk
of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings
⇒ page 209.
Note
• The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
• In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear in the display.
Trailer turn signals
This warning lamp also flashes when the turn signals are
operated while towing a caravan or trailer.
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle.
The warning lamp will not flash if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.
Tailgate open display* ⇒ page 77
Windscreen washer fluid* ⇒ page 77
Door open display* ⇒ page 77
Brake pad wear indicator* ⇒ page 77
Engine oil level/pressure* ⇒ page 77
Coolant temperature/level gauge ⇒ page 78
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further information
A
19
A
20
A
21
A
22
A
23
A
24
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 72 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 73
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched
on. Further information see page 176.
Operating the foot brake
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further
information ⇒ page 108.
Faults in diesel engines
This indicator monitors the engine management system for
diesel engines.
If a malfunction occurs in the engine management system while you are
driving, the control lamp will flash
. Take the vehicle to an Authorised
Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on
the instrument panel.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are in oper-
ation.
Depending on which turn signal is operated, either the left or right indi-
cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the
hazard warning lights are switched on.
If one turn signal fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
Further information on the turn signals ⇒ page 111.
Engine management
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
when the engine has started running.
If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehicle to an Authorised
Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on or when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information ⇒ page 111.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 73 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit74
Fault in the exhaust system*
Exhaust gas indicator
If the indicator flashes it signals possible damage to the catalytic
converter caused by defective combustion. Reduce speed immediately and
go to the nearest specialised workshop to check the engine. At the same
time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on the instru-
ment panel.
If the indicator
lights up, a fault has developed during driving which has
affects the quality of the exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed
immediately and go to the nearest specialised workshop to check the engine.
At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on
the instrument panel.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see ⇒ page 181.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation
programme.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and TCS.
The warning lamp
has the following functions:
• It will light for about 2 seconds when the ignition is switched on while a
test of the function is carried out.
• It flashes when the ESP is activated when driving.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
• It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp
lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
• The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
• The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 74 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 75
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the ⇒ page 180.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp
lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system ⇒ .
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp
, stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 221, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has
dropped below the “MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident.
Obtain technical assistance.
• If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have
been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop
and have the fault corrected.
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL ⇒ page 182.
Diesel particulate filter indicator lamp*
When the indicator lights on the instrument panel it signals that the filter
is blocked by soot because of frequent short journeys. To clean the filter of
these particulates, drive at a constant speed of 60 km/h for 15 minutes.
Always respect the speed limit. The most efficient way to clean the diesel
particulate filter is to drive in 4th or 5th gear, at approximately 2,000 rpm
⇒ . This causes a temperature increase sufficient to burn the soot in the
filter.
If the lamp
remains lit afterwards, go to a specialised workshop to
examine the problem.
While the lamp
is lit (filter blockage signal) fuel consumption increases
and the engine may lose power in some cases.
At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on
the instrument panel.
WARNING
• Try to always adapt the speed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic
conditions. The indications suggested by the warning lights should not
lead you to disobey the highway code.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 75 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit76
Brake system* / handbrake
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the
brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake
system.
This warning lamp lights up if
• If the handbrake is on
• If the brake fluid level is too low
• If there is a fault in the brake system
This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system
warning lamp.
WARNING
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on
• If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when
driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Risk of accident.
Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.
• If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp
, the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the
rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified
workshop and have the fault corrected.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp
lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
If the indicator flashes the voltage is insufficient for normal vehicle
operation.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is down to
the reserve level.
This lights when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible
warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 76 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 77
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Tailgate open display*
When the ignition is switched on, the warning light indicates that the tailgate
is open.
The warning light only goes off when the tailgate is completely closed.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
⇒ page 218.
Door open display*
This light comes on when a door is open or incorrectly closed.
Brake pad wear indicator*
As the brake pad wear indicator only monitors the front brake pads, it is advis-
able to have the rear brake pads inspected at the same time.
WARNING
Have the brake pads inspected immediately by a qualified dealership if the
warning display
lights up.
Engine oil pressure
The warning light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too
low or that the oil gauge does not operate correctly.
It lights up or flashes in red (oil pressure too low)
If the warning light lights up or starts to flash in red while driving, a sound
signal will also be emitted three times when the engine speed exceeds 1500
rpm. Stop and switch off the engine: check the oil level and replace if neces-
sary ⇒ page 214.
If the warning light flashes even though the oil level is correct, do not
continue driving The engine should not be turning even at idle speed. Obtain
technical assistance.
If, while driving, the engine speed falls to below idling speed, the oil pressure
warning light may come on. Increase the engine speed by accelerating or
dropping to a lower gear.
A yellow light comes on (oil level* too low)
If the warning light comes on in yellow, this indicates that the oil level is too
low. Switch off engine, check oil level, replacing where necessary.
When the bonnet is opened the oil level warning will fall to zero. But if it is not
topped with oil, the light will come back on after approximately 100 km.
Yellow flashing (defective oil level*)
If the oil gauge is faulty, a sound signal is emitted and the warning light
flashes several times.
At the same time, a warning appears briefly on the on board computer
display*. The engine should immediately be checked by a Technical Service
Centre.
From the moment the defect appears until the engine is checked, the level of
oil should be constantly monitored, preferably every time the vehicle is
refuelled.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 77 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit78
Coolant Level* / temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
• The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
three acoustic warning signals ⇒ are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle,
switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary ⇒ page 241.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
The following information text is displayed in the instrument panel display.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ⇒ .
WARNING
• If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a
safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and
place the warning triangle.
• Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no
longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
• The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area!
Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings
⇒ page 209.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 78 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 79
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
On board computer with multifunction display
Description
The information from the multi-function indicator and on board computer is
shown on these displays. The functions and indications of the multi-function
indicator are described in the chapter “Intruments”.
When the ignition is switched on, the on-board computer continually controls
the working of certain systems and vehicle components while the vehicle is
in motion.
Faults in the operation or urgent repairs or services are indicated by sound
signals and light warnings in red or yellow,depending on priority, on the
instrument panel.
In addition to the red and yellow symbols, text messages appear on the
driver's display.
Note
• Depending on the model version or the country, it is possible that the
equipment installed in your vehicle does not display certain messages, or
they do not correspond with those in this manual. For this reason, we advise
you to consult the chapter “Luminous Indicators” for complementary informa-
tion on the different symbols and a description of their function.
Check operation
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
If faults exist, these will be indicated after the ignition is switched on. The
corresponding sound signal is emitted at the same time.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Once the ignition is switched on with the lever in position P or N, the driver
warning appears on the display:
WITH CAR STOPPED, DEPRESS BRAKE TO SELECT GEAR
After selecting a gear (R, D, etc) the warning is erased.
Fig. 49 Vehicle instru-
ment panel display with
telematic or navigation
system.
Fig. 50 Display in vehicle
with on-board computer.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 79 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit80
Where one or more faults exist, the warning disappears some 15 seconds
after the engine is started, and the corresponding fault symbols with their
respective text messages appear on the display.
For all vehicles
A sound signal is emitted in the event of a fault:
• Priority 1 - three buzzes
• Priority 2 - one buzz
If priority 1 and 2 faults occur at the same time, three buzzes are emitted.
In the event of a fault, the symbol with the corresponding text message is
displayed.
Note
Priority 2 faults are displayed after repairing or eliminating priority 1 faults.
Priority 1 (red symbols)
Priority 1 symbols warn of a dangerous situation. Therefore
the engine should be stopped and switched off.
Where various priority 1 faults exist, the symbols appear one by one for
approx 2 seconds The symbols will keep flashing until the faults have been
rectified.
The following priority 1 warnings or faults may appear:
Engine oil pressure
The corresponding warning is:
STOP PRES. OIL
STOP ENGINE!
If this symbol begins to flash while driving, stop and switch off the engine
immediately. Check the oil level and replace if necessary.
If the symbol continues flashing, even though the oil level is correct, do not
continue driving. The engine should not turn over even at idling speed, tech-
nical assistance is necessary.
Brake system
The corresponding warning is:
STOP BRAKE FLUID
SERVICE MANUAL.
This symbol lights up if the level of brake fluid is too low. Stop the vehicle
immediately and check the level of the brake fluid
2. ABS, EDL*, TCS* and ESP* systems
The corresponding warning is:
STOP BRAKES FAULTY
SERVICE MANUAL.
If the brake warning light flashes while the ABS warning light is lit up, this
indicates that the ABS system is faulty and that the behaviour of the normal
brake system may be damaged.
The EDS system works in conjunction with the ABS. If the EDS stops working,
the ABS warning lamp comes on. When the ASR and the ESP fail this light also
comes on. Consult a Technical Service Centre as soon as possible.
3. Handbrake
The corresponding warning is:
HANDBRAKE ON
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied with
the ignition on It should go out when the handbrake is released. If it does not
this indicates a fault in the brake system.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 80 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 81
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
An audible signal is also given if the car is driven faster than 6 km/h (approx.
4 mph) with the handbrake applied.
Coolant temperature/level gauge
The corresponding warning is:
STOP CHECK LEVEL COOLANT
SERVICE MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes while driving, this means that either the coolant temper-
ature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Stop immediately, switch off
the engine and check the level. Top up coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. In this case, check the radiator fan fuse, and replace if
necessary.
If the warning light does not go out, although the coolant level is correct and
the fan fuse is correct, do not continue driving. Obtain technical assistance.
If the fault is only in the radiator fan, it is possible to continue driving as far
as the nearest Technical Service Centre, as long as the coolant level is correct
and the display light is off.
Alternator
The corresponding warning is:
ALTERNATOR WORKSHOP!
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out
when the engine is started.
The alternator is operated by a long-lasting drive belt.
If the warning light lights up while driving, stop, switch off the engine and
check the drive belt. If the belt is loose or broken, do not continue driving, as
the coolant pump will not be driven. The belt should be checked or replaced.
If the warning light comes on even though the belt is neither loose nor
broken, it is usually possible to continue driving to the nearest Technical
Service Centre.
As the vehicle battery will discharge, it is advisable to switch off all non-vital
electrical consumers.
Seat belt warning lamp
The corresponding warning is:
FASTEN SEAT BELT
This warning light (only in some countries) lights up for approximately 6
seconds when the ignition is switched on to remind occupants to fasten seat-
belts. If the seat belts are not fastened, a sound signal is emitted when the
ignition is switched on which will stop when the seat belts are fastened or
after approximately 6 seconds.
WARNING
• If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN” mark, you should wait for
assistance from specialised personnel before continuing to drive.
• If the fluid level is correct, the fault may lie in the ABS. If the ABS control
system fails, the rear wheels may block rapidly on braking. This, in certain
circumstances, could cause the vehicle to skid.
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the
engine compartment. Risk of burns. Wait until you can no longer see or
hear escaping steam or coolant.
• Do not touch the fan, as it could suddenly start to operate, even if the
ignition is switched off.
• To prevent burns from boiling coolant, the following should be
observed:
• Take care when opening the coolant expansion tank!. When the engine
is warm or hot, the system is pressurised! Therefore wait until the engine
cools before opening the cap.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 81 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit82
• To protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or fluid, cover the
fan cap with a large cloth in order to open it.
• Take care to avoid coolant spilling on the exhaust pipe or any other hot
component as antifreeze is inflammable.
Priority 2 (yellow symbols)
If a yellow symbol appears, a sound signal is emitted. The symbols indicate
a dangerous situation. The function shown should be controlled as fast as
possible. If various faults occur at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one by one for approx. 2 seconds.
Oil level too low
The corresponding warning is:
CHECK LEVEL OIL
If the symbol lights up: stop, switch off the engine and check the oil level,
topping up where necessary.
Oil level too low
The corresponding warning is:
OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP!
If the symbol flashes this probably means that the oil level sensor is defec-
tive. The vehicle should immediately be taken to a Technical Service Centre.
It is possible to continue driving, but the oil level should be continually moni-
tored, e.g. every time the vehicle is refuelled.
Engine fault
- Petrol engine
- Diesel engine
The corresponding warning is:
ENGINE FAULT WORKSHOP!
If a fault in the running of the engine arises while driving, the corresponding
light will come on (petrol engine) or flash (diesel engine). In this case the
engine should be checked immediately by a Technical Service Centre.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The corresponding warning is:
ABS FAULT
A fault in the ABS system is shown in the following manner:
If the ABS warning light comes on separately, it is possible to brake the
vehicle using the normal brake system (without ABS). Consult a Technical
Service Centre as soon as possible.
Electronic immobiliser
The corresponding warning is:
IMMOBILIS.ACTIVE
When the ignition is switched on, the vehicle key data is automatically
consulted. The warning light will flash to confirm that the data is being
checked
If an unauthorised key is used, the warning light will flash constantly. It will
not be possible to start the vehicle.
Tailgate/bonnet open display *
The corresponding warning is:
TAILGATE OPEN
This warning light only indicates that the tailgate is open.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 82 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 83
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The warning light only goes off when the tailgate is completely closed ( to the
second position)
Windscreen washer*
The corresponding warning is:
TOP UP WASHER FLUID
This symbol lights up to indicate that the windscreen washer level is too low.
Top up windscreen and headlight washer fluid*
Fuel level low
The corresponding warning is:
PLEASE REFUEL
Navigation system*
If the vehicle has a navigation system it is possible to go from one display to
the other using the button on the windscreen wiper lever ( by holding it
pressed in for over 2 seconds):
• Navigation display
• Multifunction display
When the navigation display or the multifunction display are activated, the
possible faults are mainly displayed on the on-board computer screen.
Instructions for the use of the SEAT navigation system are included in a sepa-
rate handbook.
Fig. 51 Button on the
windscreen washer lever:
Fig. 52 On-board
computer display:
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 83 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit84
Steering wheel controls
Multifunction steering wheel*
These controls enable you to perform various functions without taking your hands off the steering wheel.
The controls on the multi-function steering wheel ⇒ fig. 53 only work when
the ignition is switched on.
Rocker switch for the cruise control system (CCS) :
− By briefly pressing the button the programmed speed is recov-
ered.
− If the button is held down the speed increases. The speed of the
vehicle at the moment the button is released will be stored.
− By briefly pressing the button the actual speed is stored.
− If the button is held down the speed decreases. The speed of the
vehicle at the moment the button is released will be stored.
Button for switching off CCS temporarily. The target speed remains
stored.
Rocker switch for volume control
8)
for the radio unit.
− Press button to raise the volume of the radio.
− Press button to lower the volume of the radio.
Rocker switch for various functions:
− Button for: station search, forwards (radio), listening to TIM
messages, starting with oldest (radio / navigation), fast forward
(cassette mode), next track (CD mode).
Fig. 53 Multi-function steering wheel with controls
A
1
-
-
A
2
8)
Only for factory-fitted radio.
A
3
A
4
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 84 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit 85
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
− Button for: station search, backwards (radio), listening to TIM
messages, starting with latest (radio / navigation), fast rewind
(cassette mode), last track (CD mode).
Pushbutton for switching lighting on and off on the controls on the multi-
function steering wheel (on the side of the steering wheel).
Note
The cruise control system is switched on and off using the button on the turn-
signal / main beam lever.
Telephone*
Handsfree system for mobile telephones*
Using the hands-free unit you can telephone without having to hold the
mobile telephone in your hand.
The voice of the person you are talking to will be relayed via the loudspeakers
of the radio system. You do not have to do anything in particular to respond -
simply behave as if you were talking to the front seat passenger.
The microphone is located on the left-hand side of the drink holder.
The required volume for the conversation can be set via the radio controls.
Note
• Please note that you will be able to hold a phone conversation through the
handsfree system only when the key is in the ignition. If the key is removed,
the conversation will only be possible through the telephone, since the
handsfree system is disconnected.
• When leaving the vehicle, either take the mobile telephone with you or
switch the automatic call acceptance off as incoming calls will be passed on
even if the radio is switched off.
Telephone preinstallation*
The telephone preinstallation consists of:
• a microphone (on the left of the drinks holder),
• an interface box,
• the automatic loudspeaker switch in the radio system to relay telephone
conversations,
• a support incorporated in the dash panel,
• and a telephone roof aerial.
In order to use the telephone together with the vehicle system, a mobile tele-
phone holder adapted to the dash panel is also required. Next, the mobile
telephone holder will then have to be connected to the dash panel telephone
console.
For any queries concerning its use, please contact your SEAT Dealer.
A
5
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 85 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cockpit86
CE0434.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 86 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Declaration of conformity
NOKIA CORPORATION declares under its sole responsibility that the product
HT-1 conforms to the provisions in 1995/5/EC of the European Union Council.
A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be requested from the Customer
Service Department for this brand.
Unlocking and locking 87
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Keys
Key set
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.
The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
• one remote control key ⇒ fig. 54 with folding key bit*,
• one key with a remote control ,
• one key tab with the key number.
Plastic key tab
Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab ⇒ fig. 54
. Therefore:
• Always keep the key tab in a safe place.
• Never leave the key tab in the vehicle.
If you sell the vehicle, please give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
Centre.
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that
electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The
doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in
people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
• Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of
your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key
with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk
of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
Caution
There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Protect the
keys from moisture and excessive vibration.
Fig. 54 Set of keys
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
B
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 87 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking88
Remote control keys*
Two keys are supplied in vehicles with remote control, a folding key and a
fixed key ⇒ fig. 55.
Note
In certain versions of the model, the remote control key may be folding. The
key works, in terms of remote control, in the same way as other remote control
keys ⇒ page 94.
Folding key*
To unfold key bit, press button ⇒ fig. 56. This unfolds with a spring
action.
To fold the key bit, press button and push key down until it clicks into
place.
Central locking
Description of the central locking system
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
the doors and the tailgate from one point.
Central locking can be operated using any of the following options:
• mechanically with the key in the driver door ⇒ page 87,
Fig. 55 Remote control
keys
Fig. 56 Folding key
A
A
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 88 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 89
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• the key with remote control
9)
⇒ page 94,
• with the central locking button ⇒ page 91.
Individual opening of doors
9)
An Authorised SEAT Service Centre can programme the individual opening of
doors.
When the key is turned once in the driver's door lock, in the direction of
opening, or when button ⇒ page 94, fig. 61 on the remote control key is
pressed, only the driver's door will unlock.
When the key is turned a second time or the button is pressed a second
time, all the doors and the tailgate are unlocked.
WARNING
• Do not leave anyone in the car if it has been locked from the outside. It
is not possible to open the doors from the inside. Locked doors could delay
assistance in an emergency. People could become trapped inside in an
emergency.
• Never close the doors without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the door.
Note
The entire vehicle is unlocked if the airbags are triggered during an accident.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the inside unless the ignition is first
switched off and back on. Following an accident, the vehicle cannot be locked
from the outside. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Opening and closing the doors with the key
Opening the doors
– Insert the key in the lock on the driver door.
– Turn the key to the open position. The doors and the tailgate are
unlocked.
Closing the doors
– Insert the key in the lock on the driver door.
– First turn the key once to the locking position ⇒ . The doors
and the tailgate are locked.
Notes on unlocking
The following applies if you wish to unlock your vehicle manually using the
key:
• The deadlock mechanism, the interior monitoring system
10)
and the anti-
theft alarm
10)
will be deactivated immediately. The deactivation is confirmed
by the turn signals flashing briefly twice.
• The interior lights in the courtesy position will be switched on for approx-
imately 20 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
• If the key is held in the unlocking position, all windows (apart from the
electric vent wing at the rear) will be opened on vehicles equipped with elec-
tric windows.
Notes on locking
The following applies if you wish to lock your vehicle manually using the key:
9)
Optional equipment
A
1
10)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 89 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking90
• The deadlock mechanism, the interior monitoring system
10)
and the anti-
theft alarm
10)
will be activated immediately if the key is turned once in the
lock. The activation is confirmed by the turn signals flashing briefly.
• The deadlock mechanism, the interior monitoring system and the anti-
theft alarm will not be activated if the key is turned in the lock twice within
one second. All the doors and the tailgate will, however, be locked. The doors
can be unlocked from the inside if the deadlock mechanism has not been
activated. To do this, operate the door opening lever on the door in question.
The alarm will go off.
• When locking the vehicle, the interior lights in the courtesy switch posi-
tion will be switched off
• A warning lamp in the driver door flashes to indicate the deadlock is
working. The warning lamp will switch off after 14 days. This is to prevent the
vehicle battery from discharging completely when the vehicle is not used for
a longer period. The system is still active.
• Windows, or the sliding roof, which are still open can be closed automat-
ically on vehicles equipped with electric windows and electric vent windows
or with an electric sliding roof. To do this, the key must be kept held in the
locking position until all windows and the sliding roof are fully closed.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse
of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and
accident.
− The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
− If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti-
vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
− The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could
result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
− Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk
of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
Caution
Each key contains electronic components. Protect the keys from moisture and
excessive vibration.
Note
• Any SEAT Service centre can programme the central locking system so that
only the driver's door is unlocked when the key is turned once to open.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 90 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 91
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Central locking buttons
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using
the central locking button in the driver door.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button ⇒ fig. 57 ⇒ .
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Neither the deadlock mechanism nor the antitheft alarm can be activated or
deactivated via the central locking button
11)
. The central locking button will
not function when the deadlock is activated.
Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your
vehicle:
• The deadlock mechanism and the anti-theft alarm
11)
are not activated
when the button is pressed.
• It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside
(this may offer extra safety, for instance when stopped at traffic lights).
• The driver door is not locked if it is open. This prevents you from locking
yourself out of the vehicle.
• You can unlock all the doors separately from inside the car. You will have
to pull the door release lever once. The door will be opened by pulling the
door release lever again.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped
inside.
• Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. The doors will
be locked when the central locking button is activated. Vehicle occupants
could become trapped in the vehicle. In the event of an accident they would
not be able to reach safety. Locked doors could make it more difficult to
assist vehicle occupants in the event of an accident.
Deadlock
The deadlock mechanism makes it more difficult to break into
the vehicle because the door release lever and the central
locking button are not active.
Activating deadlock
–Turn the key once in the driver's door lock to lock or
11)
Optional equipment
Fig. 57 Detail of driver
door: central locking
system button
A
A
A
B
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 91 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking92
–press once the locking button on the remote control
12)
. A red
warning lamp in the driver door flashes to indicate the deadlock
is working.
Deactivating deadlock when the vehicle is locked
–Turn the key twice in the driver's door lock to lock or
–press twice the locking button on the remote control
12)
. The
vehicle is locked without activating the deadlock.
The doors can be unlocked from the inside if the deadlock mechanism has not
been activated. You will have to pull the door release lever once. The door will
be opened by pulling the door release lever again. When the deadlock is
deactivated, the anti-theft alarm
12)
⇒ page 96 and the interior monitoring
system are also deactivated
12)
.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the deadlock mechanism has been
activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside. Locked doors
could delay assistance in an emergency. People could become trapped
inside in an emergency.
Door release lever
The doors and the tailgate can also be locked and unlocked centrally by oper-
ating the driver's door release lever. Press or pull lever ⇒ fig. 58. In this case
the deadlock is not activated. The door release lever for the front passenger
door and the rear doors have no influence on the other safety areas. When
used, these release levers will only lock and unlock their own areas.
The opened driver's door cannot be locked using the door release lever. This
prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle.
Note
The deadlock mechanism will be activated if the vehicle is locked from the
inside by accident using the radio remote control. The doors can then no
longer be opened from the inside or the outside. The deadlock mechanism
will be released if the ignition is switched on. The doors can be opened using
the door release levers. First push the door release lever in and then pull it
out.
12)
Optional equipment
Fig. 58 Driver's door
release lever in normal
position
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 92 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Childproof locks
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened
from the inside.
Activating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door you wish to child-proof.
– Move the lever using the vehicle key in the direction of the arrow
⇒ fig. 59.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Unlock the car and open the door on which you wish to deacti-
vate the child-proof lock.
– Move the lever using the vehicle key in the opposite direction to
the arrow.
The childproof lock can be activated to prevent children opening the doors by
accident. When the childproof lock is activated, the door can be opened from
the outside only. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated using
a key when the door is open.
Fig. 59 Release for the
child lock in the rear left-
hand door
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 93 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking94
Key with remote control
Unlocking and locking vehicle
The remote control key enables you to lock and unlock the
vehicle from a distance.
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button ⇒ fig. 61 on remote control to unlock all the
doors and tailgate.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button on remote control to lock all the doors and
tailgate.
When either of these buttons is pressed, the battery indicator lamp on the key
⇒ fig. 61 lights up.
Using button ⇒ fig. 61 on the control, the key shaft is released.
The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the remote
control. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The remote control, when
fitted with new batteries, has a range of several metres around the car. Obsta-
cles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and
discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control
⇒ page 95.
Fig. 60 Range of the
remote control
Fig. 61 Assignment of
buttons on the remote
control key
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 94 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer-
gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
• Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse
of the keys, for example, by children, may result in serious damage and
accident.
− The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
− If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti-
vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
− The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could
result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
− Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk
of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
Note
• An Authorised SEAT Service Centre can programme the individual
opening of doors. In this case, when the unlock button on the remote
control is pressed once, only the driver's door is unlocked ⇒ page 89. When
the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
Seat Service will be happy to provide more information on the activation of
this function.
• The remote control transmitter and the batteries are integrated in the
remote control. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. Obstacles
between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and
discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.
• The remote control only locks and unlocks the vehicle when it is used
within range.
• The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of
the doors or the tailgate 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake.
• If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control,
this should be re-synchronised ⇒ page 95 or change the battery ⇒ page 95.
• The working of the remote control may be momentarily affected if there is
transmitter using the same waveband (e.g. radiotelephone, mobile tele-
phone, etc) in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Synchronising the remote control key
Synchronising the remote control key
– Briefly press the open button ⇒ page 94, fig. 61 once.
– Then open or close the vehicle using the key bit within one
minute ⇒ page 89.
The vehicle can no longer be opened and closed with the remote control if you
press button ⇒ page 94, fig. 61 a long way outside the effective range
of the radio wave remote control. The remote control key will have to be resyn-
chronised.
Spare remote control keys are available from SEAT Service. They must be
matched to the locking system.
Up to four remote control keys can be used.
Replacing the battery
If the battery indicator on the remote control ⇒ page 94, fig. 61 does not
flash when the buttons are pushed, the battery must be replaced.
A
1
A
1
A
4
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 95 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking96
We recommend having the batteries changed by a qualified workshop if
required.
Caution
Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the remote control. For this
reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same size and
power.
For the sake of the environment
The flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with regulations
governing the protection of the environment.
Anti-theft alarm system
Description of anti-theft alarm system
The anti-theft alarm triggers an alarm if unauthorised move-
ments are detected around the vehicle.
Activating the anti-theft alarm
– Blocking the engine.
Deactivating the alarm
– Unblock the vehicle using the unlock button on the remote
control or switch on ignition.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
– If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to
unlock the car. This is done as follows:
Fig. 62 Interior moni-
toring system sensor
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 96 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press button ⇒ page 94, fig. 61 to fold out the key bit.
– Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-
theft alarm system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered
immediately.
– Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. When the ignition is
switched on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid
vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. If you do
not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds, the alarm is trig-
gered.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms
13)
are triggered if the car is opened using the
mechanical key, or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the car is locked:
• Opening of vehicle using mechanical key without switching on ignition
within the next 15 seconds
• Opening a door
• Opening the bonnet
• Opening the tailgate
• Switching on the ignition
• Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring).
The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.
Interior monitoring system
The sensors for the interior monitoring system are located at the top of the
door post between the front and rear door ⇒ page 96, fig. 62 The sensors
must not be covered, as they will otherwise not be able to function properly.
The windows must be closed when the interior monitoring system is active as
the anti-theft alarm could be triggered by a draft of air.
Note
• If, after the alarm goes off, access is gained to a second secured zone
(e.g. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the warning signal
is triggered again.
• Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
13)
Optional equipment
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 97 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking98
Tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Unlocking the tailgate
– Make sure that the key slot is vertical.
– Operate the handle and pull up the tailgate ⇒ .
Closing the tailgate
– Take hold of one of the recessed handles in the interior trim of the
tailgate.
– Close the tailgate hard ⇒ in “Safety instructions for the tail-
gate” on page 100.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
14)
if the tailgate is open or not
properly closed. Depending on the level of equipment fitted, an audible
warning
14)
will be given either while the vehicle is stationary or when you
drive.
Locking and unlocking the tailgate
• The doors and the tailgate will be locked by turning the vehicle key to
position ⇒ fig. 63 .
• The doors and the tailgate will be unlocked by turning the vehicle key to
position .
Key slot positions
Windows, or the sliding roof, which are still open can be closed automat-
ically on vehicles equipped with electric windows and electric vent
windows or with an electric sliding roof. To do this, the vehicle key must
be kept held in position ⇒ fig. 63 until all windows and the sliding
roof are fully closed.
If the key is held in position , all windows (apart from the electric vent
wing) will be opened on vehicles equipped with electric windows.
The tailgate can, if the central locking system or the servomotor lock is
defective, be unlocked manually by turning the vehicle key to position
.
Convenience opening of the tailgate
It is not possible to open the tailgate when the ignition is on. This helps
prevent theft (e.g. at traffic lights). This function will remain active for approx.
30 seconds after the ignition is switched off as long as no door is opened.
When a door is opened, the tailgate immediately unlocks.
For greater convenience, it is possible to open the tailgate for up to 30
seconds after the last door has been closed and the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 63 Key slot positions
of tailgate lock
14)
Optional equipment
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
C
A
C
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 98 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Driving with the tailgate open
If the tailgate is open or incorrectly closed, the following warning may be
appear on the display
14)
. Please note that theft of your cargo is more likely if
the tailgate is open.
WARNING
If you have to drive with the tailgate open, please observe the following
warnings:
• Observe the following points to reduce the danger of poisoning from
exhaust fumes entering the vehicle interior:
− Close all windows.
− Close the sliding/tilting roof,
− Switch off air recirculation.
− Open the air outlets in the dash panel,
− Set the fresh air blower to the highest speed.
• Drive particularly carefully and think ahead. If possible, avoid sudden
braking and driving manoeuvres as this could cause the open tailgate to
move unpredictably. Risk of injury.
• When carrying objects that protrude from the boot, the correct signals
should be used; otherwise there is a risk of accident. Observe legal require-
ments when doing so.
• Always secure objects in the boot. Loose items could fall out of the
vehicle and injure other road users.
• If a baggage rack is fitted on the tailgate, it should be removed before
travelling with the tailgate open.
• Read and always observe the safety information concerning the use of
the tailgate ⇒ page 100.
Closing the tailgate
Before closing the tailgate, make sure that the key has not been left
inside the boot.
Closing the tailgate
– Take hold of the grip in the inside trim of the tailgate ⇒ and
pull the tailgate down.
– Pull hard.
A display appears in the combi-instrument if the tailgate is not properly
closed
15)
.
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
• Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the
window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!
• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect-
edly while driving.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even
have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the tailgate.
15)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 99 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking100
Safety instructions for the tailgate
WARNING
For safety reasons, you should always keep the tailgate fully closed when
driving. Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
• Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect-
edly while driving.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the tailgate.
• Loose objects which could fall out of the vehicle when the tailgate is
opened could cause injury.
• If you have objects (for example bicycles) on a rack fitted to the tailgate,
you may not be able to open the tailgate fully, or the additional weight
could close the tailgate. For this reason, you should support the tailgate or
remove the objects from the rack. Risk of injury.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle
can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on
the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even
have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicle. Make sure first that there is no
one in the vehicle.
• If you have to drive with the tailgate open, observe the all notes
⇒ page 99 to reduce the risk, for example, of poisoning caused by exhaust
fumes entering the passenger compartment.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 100 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Windows
Opening and closing the windows electrically
All electric windows can be operated using the controls in the
driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own
window.
Opening and closing the windows
– Press button ⇒ fig. 64 , , or to open the corre-
sponding window.
– Pull button to close a window ⇒ .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
⇒ .
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened.
Buttons in the driver door
Button for the left front door window with one-touch opening and closing
⇒ page 102
Button for the right front door window with one-touch opening and
closing ⇒ page 102
Safety switch
16)
for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
16)
Button for window in rear right door
16)
Safety switch
Safety switch ⇒ fig. 64 in the driver door can be used to disable the elec-
tric window buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Misuse of the keys, for example, by children,
may result in serious damage and accident.
− The engine may accidentally be started and be out of control.
Fig. 64 Detail of driver
door: buttons for front and
rear electric windows
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
5
16)
Optional equipment
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 101 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking102
− If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be acti-
vated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.
− The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could
result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
− Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off
and one of the front doors has been opened.
• If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows.
Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again ⇒ page 103. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch closing and opening
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
The one-touch closing and opening of the electric windows can only
be controlled with the switches on the driver's door. The buttons
⇒ page 101, fig. 64 and have two levels for opening the
front windows and two for closing. This makes it easier to open or
close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing
– Pull up the button for the window briefly to the second position.
The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
– Push down the button for the window briefly to the second posi-
tion. The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
– The one-touch opening and closing function is not active after
the vehicle battery has been disconnected or is empty and will
have to be reset.
– Close all windows and doors.
– Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage, the window will open (or close)
until you release the button. If you push or lift the button briefly to the second
stage, the window will open (one-touch opening) or close (one-touch closing)
automatically. If you operate the button while the window is opening or
closing, it stops at this position.
The one-touch opening and closing function will not function once the igni-
tion has been switched off.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING (continued)
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 102 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Roll-back function on electric windows*
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
• If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and opens immediately ⇒ .
• If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds, the
window's closing force is automatically increased.
• If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point.
• If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within five seconds. The roll-back function is now deactivated.
The window closes with maximum force.
If more than 5 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one
of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
• Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left
unsupervised in the vehicle.
• The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off
and one of the front doors has been opened.
• Never close the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear, to
do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that
no one is in the path of a window.
• Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle
from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
• The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the
body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.
Note
The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
⇒ page 105.
Convenience opening and closing
The windows can be opened and closed centrally from
outside the vehicle.
– Using the door lock: Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's
door in either the locking or the unlocking position until all
windows with electric function are either opened or closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
WARNING
Never close the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do
otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. The windows will
be closed with the rollback function if the convenience closing function is
used. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 103 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking104
Mechanical vent wings
The rear vent wings can be opened and closed manually.
Opening
– Pull the release lever ⇒ fig. 65 in the direction of the arrow and
push it out at the same time until the lever engages.
Closing
– Pull the release lever in the opposite direction to the arrow and
push it back until the lever engages.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the vent wings can result in injury!
• Never close the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear, to
do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that
no one is in the path of a window.
Sliding/tilting sun roof
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting roof is opened and closed using the switch
when the ignition is switched on.
Opening sliding/tilting roof
– Press the surface ⇒ fig. 66 .
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
– Press the surface .
Closing the sliding/tilting roof
– Press the surface . ⇒
Fig. 65 Release lever for
mechanical vent wing
Fig. 66 Interior roof trim:
control of sliding/tilting
roof
A
1
A
2
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 104 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended ⇒ .
If you wish to tilt the roof when the sliding roof is open, press surface until
the function has been carried out. If the sliding roof is to be opened directly
from the tilted position, press surface to carry out the required function.
Once the ignition has been switched off, the sliding/tilting sun roof can no
longer be opened or closed.
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
• Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring
it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others.
Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
• Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if
they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that
the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric
windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an
emergency.
• The sliding/tilting sunroof operates as long as the ignition is switched
on.
Note
The roof can be closed by hand if the system is defective.
Convenience closing*
– Using the door lock: keep the key in the driver's door lock in the
close position until the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed.
– Release the key to interrupt this function.
During convenience closing, first the windows and then the sliding roof will
be closed.
WARNING
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is
clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. The
sliding/tilting sunroof closes with the roll-back function activated.
However, always make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting
sunroof.
Note
The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
A
2
A
1
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 105 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking106
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects
getting trapped when the roof is closed. ⇒ The roll-back function does
not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The
sliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens again immediately if it is obstructed
when closing.
If the sliding/tilting roof has been opened again by the roll-back function, it
can be closed only by pressing button ⇒ page 104, fig. 66 until the
sliding/tilting roof has closed fully. The sliding/tilting roof then closes
without the roll-back function.
If it still does not close, consult a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
• Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring
it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others.
Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Fig. 67 Interior roof trim:
control of sliding/tilting
roof
A
3
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 106 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Manual release
In the event of a breakdown, the sunroof may be closed manually.
– Remove the interior light To do so, insert a screwdriver on the
right-hand side, between the light and the covering and turn the
screwdriver.
– Invert the screwdriver head and undo the two Philips screws
⇒ fig. 68.
– Move the cover in the direction of the arrow and remove
⇒ fig. 68.
–Turn the cover ⇒ fig. 69 of the lever opening in the direction
of the arrow.
– Remove the lever from its casing, insert it in the opening and
close the roof.
– Replace the lever in its casing and turn the cover ⇒ fig. 69
over the lever opening.
– Replace the cover and interior light.
Fig. 68 Manual release
Fig. 69 Manual release
A
1
A
2
A
A
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 107 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility108
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the daylight driving light (only available in some
countries)
– To switch on the daylight driving lights, leave the light switch in
position O when you turn on the ignition.
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 70 to position
⇒ .
Switching on dipped headlights
– Turn the light switch to position
.
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position O.
Switching on the front fog lights
17)
– Pull the switch out of position or to the first stop. The
symbol
in the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position
to the last stop. A warning lamp
lights up in the instrument panel.
Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
– Pull the switch out of position
or to the second stop. A
warning lamp lights up in the control panel.
The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The head-
lights are automatically switched to the side light setting while the engine is
being started and after the ignition has been switched off.
The daylight driving light
18)
automatically comes on when the ignition is
switched on. It is not necessary to turn on the light switch. The daylight
driving lights are switched on as long as the ignition is switched on.
Rear fog light
The rear fog light is so bright that it may dazzles drivers behind. You should
use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
Fig. 70 Detailed view of
dash panel lights, fog
light and rear fog light
control
17)
Optional equipment
18)
for selected markets only
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 108 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility 109
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a
factory-fitted towing bracket
17)
, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
WARNING
• Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights
are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch
off the lights.
• The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
• If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
• The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Coming Home function (guide lights)
The Coming Home function (guide lights) allows the vehicle
lights to stay on for approximately 3 minutes after the ignition
is switched off.
To activate the Coming Home function the vehicle lights should have
already been switched on.
– Switch off vehicle lights.
–Switch off ignition.
– Keep all doors closed.
– Briefly pull the turn signal lever towards the steering wheel
within a maximum of 2 minutes after switching off the lights.
– Open the driver door.
When the driver's door is opened, the vehicle lights automatically light up for
approx. 3 minutes. If the door is closed within 3 minutes, the guide lights will
stay on for approximately. 30 seconds. If the door is closed after 3 minutes,
the vehicle lights switch off and the guide lights are not activated.
Illumination of instruments and switches and headlight
range control
Fig. 71 Instrument panel:
headlight range control
and illumination of
instruments and switches
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 109 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility110
Illumination of instruments and switches
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
switch ⇒ page 109, fig. 71 .
Headlight range control
Using the headlight range control, you can adjust the headlight range to the
load level that is being carried in the vehicle. In this way it is possible to avoid
dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same time, the driver
has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the correct headlight
settings.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the switch down from the basic setting 0.
If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is
possible to select intermediary positions.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge lamps
19)
(“xenon lamps”) are equipped with
dynamic headlight range control. When the dipped light is switched on, the
range of the headlights adjusts to the vehicle load condition. In these vehi-
cles, the control is not available.
WARNING
In order not to dazzle other drivers, the dipped light should be adjusted
according to the vehicle load using the headlight range control. If not, an
accident may occur.
• Use the switch to lower the light cone, depending on the vehicle load.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If you have a breakdown:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press button ⇒ fig. 72 to switch on the hazard warning lights
⇒ .
The settings on the switch correspond roughly to the following load condi-
tions:
- Front seats occupied and light luggage in the vehicle
1 Several seats occupied and light luggage in the vehicle
2 All seats occupied and heavy luggage in luggage compartment
3 Front seats occupied and heavy luggage in luggage compart-
ment
19)
Optional equipment
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
2
Fig. 72 Switch for hazard
warning lights
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 110 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility 111
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake firmly.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear. On an automatic move
the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for
instance when:
• reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
• there is an emergency
• your vehicle breaks down due to a technical defect
• you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. The turn signal lights
and the button warning light will
also flash. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched
off.
WARNING
• The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always
use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention
of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt
petrol. This could start a fire!
Note
• The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time - even if the ignition is switched off.
• If the hazard warning lights are not working, you must use an alternative
method of drawing attention to your vehicle. This method must comply with
traffic legislation.
• The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Fig. 73 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 111 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility112
Switching on the turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up ⇒ page 111, fig. 73 to indicate
right, and all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
– Move the lever upwards or downwards to change lanes.
Switching main beam on and off
– Turn the light switch to position
⇒ page 108, fig. 70.
– Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.
– Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
– Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the lock.
– Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand
parking lights respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the
main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
• The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the combi-instrument. The warning
lamp
20)
flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-
tive, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs
are damaged, warning lamp does not light up. You should have the bulbs
replaced.
• Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the hazard warning
lights are switched on.
• If one turn signal fails, whether that of the vehicle or of the trailer, the
warning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
• The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp
then comes on in the combi-
instrument.
• The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever – even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp
then comes on in the
combi-instrument.
• When the parking light is switched on, the front side light and the rear
light of the corresponding side of the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights will
only work if the key is removed from the ignition.
• If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened. This is a
reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave the
parking light on.
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
20)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 112 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility 113
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Interior lights and reading lights
The rocker control ⇒ fig. 74 for the interior lights has the following posi-
tions: permanently lit
, door contact connection and off.
Courtesy light position
The interior lights are automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked
or a door is opened. and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the
doors. They also go off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Press the symbol on the rocker switch to switch the interior lights at front
and rear on permanently.
Switching off the interior light
When the switch is in the intermediary position, the front and rear lights are
permanently switched off.
Reading light for the front passenger
The reading light for the front passenger is switched on and off with the
button ⇒ fig. 74 .
Reading light in the passenger compartment
There is a reading light above each rear door ⇒ fig. 75.
Using the button -arrow- the reading light is switched on or off.
Glove compartment light
The light in the glove box on the front passenger side will only light up if the
lights are switched on and the glove box is open.
Luggage compartment lighting
The light is switched on automatically when the tailgate
21)
is opened and is
switched off when it is closed.
Fig. 74 Interior roof trim:
Interior lighting and
reading light in the front
of vehicle
Fig. 75 Reading light in
the passenger compart-
ment
A
A
21)
Optional equipment
A
B
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 113 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility114
Note
• If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched
off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the
courtesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
• Reading lights function independently of the interior lights and must be
switched off manually to prevent the battery being drained when the engine
is switched off.
Interior light
Interior light permanently switched off
– In switch position ⇒ fig. 76, the interior and reading lights
are switched off.
Switching on the reading light
– Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position
(right reading light).
Door light position
– Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automati-
cally switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key
removed from the ignition lock The light turns off about 20
seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior lights are
switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
– Turn the control to position .
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver and front passenger can be folded down or pulled
out of their mountings and turned towards the doors.
The make-up mirrors in the sun visors have covers. When you open the cover
, a lamp* in the roof lights up.
The roof light goes off when the cover of the make-up mirror is closed.
Note
Before you leave the car, you should make sure that the make-up mirror cover
in the visor is closed. This prevents the battery discharging.
Fig. 76 Interior light
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
3
A
5
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 114 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility 115
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rear window heating
To connect the rear window heater, press the button ⇒ fig. 77 on the
console with the ignition on. A symbol in the button lights up when the rear
window heating is switched on.
The rear window heating is switched off after a delay of approx. 20 minutes.
It can also be switched off beforehand by pushing the button.
Windscreen heating*
Press button ⇒ fig. 78 in the central console while the engine is running
to switch on the windscreen heating. A symbol in the button lights up when
the windscreen heating is switched on.
The windscreen heating is switched off automatically after a delay of approx.
10 minutes. The windscreen heating works only when the engine is running.
Note
• The passenger compartment heating blower will be switched off when the
windscreen heating is switched on.
• In vehicles fitted with an air conditioning system ⇒ page 152 the wind-
screen heating function is automatically switched on for a maximum of 4
minutes depending upon the outside weather conditions, to aid deicing.
Fig. 77 Centre console:
rear window heating
button
Fig. 78 Centre console:
windscreen heating
button
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 115 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility116
Windscreen washers
Windscreen wiper
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 79 has the following positions:
Intermittent wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
– Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the
intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:
short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch
.
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position .
Brief wipe
– Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a brief
wipe.
Windscreen wiper and washer system
– Pull the lever to position . A jet of water will be sprayed on the
windscreen while the lever is held in this position.
– Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximately
4seconds.
Switching off the wipers
– Move the lever to position .
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
• In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless
you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system.
The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
your view of the road.
• Observe the warnings “Changing wiper blades”.
Fig. 79 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever
A
1
A
A
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
0
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 116 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility 117
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever controls the rear window wipers
and the automatic rear window wash and wipe.
Connecting the intermittent wipe
– Press the lever forwards to position ⇒ fig. 80 . The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
– Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Connect the rear window automatic wipe
– Press the lever fully forwards to position ⇒ fig. 80 . The rear
window washer starts to work immediately while the rear window
wiper starts a little later and continues working while the lever is
in this position.
– Release the lever. The wiper then wipes for approximately 4
seconds, and then in intervals again.
WARNING
• A worn or dirty wiper blade will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
• Observe the warnings “Changing wiper blades”.
Caution
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
before using the wiper for the first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
wiper blade is frozen to the glass, this could damage both the wiper blade
and the wiper motor.
Note
• The rear window wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on
and the tailgate is closed.
• The rear window wiper is automatically connected when the windscreen
wiper is on and reverse gear is engaged (manual gearbox) or the selector
lever of the automatic gear box is placed in position R.
Fig. 80 Windscreen wiper
and windscreen wash
lever rear window wiper
A
6
A
6
A
7
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 117 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility118
Headlamp washer*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel ⇒ page 116, fig. 79 for at least 5 seconds – provided the dipped
headlights or main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects,
etc.) from the headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel
tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzles in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
When the rear-view mirror is in standard position, the lever on the lower edge
of the mirror should face forwards. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-
dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
22)
When the ignition is on, the interior mirror will darken automatically
according to the amount of light it receives. The mirror will return to the
normal position if the reverse gear is selected.
A
5
22)
Optional equipment
Fig. 81 Automatic anti-
dazzle function for inte-
rior mirror
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 118 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility 119
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
This function can be activated and deactivated by pressing the rearview
mirror switch ⇒ page 118, fig. 81 . When it is activated, the warning lamp
lights up .
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the driver's door.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ⇒ fig. 82 to position (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn knob to position (right exterior mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the car ⇒ .
Electric folding wing mirror housings
23)
– Turn knob to position to fold in the wing mirrors electri-
cally.
Folding wing mirrors back out
23)
– Turn the knob to another position to fold the exterior mirrors back
out. ⇒
Synchronised wing mirror adjustment
23)
1. Turn the control to the position (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised). If necessary the
right wing mirror adjustment may need correcting.
Heated wing mirrors
23)
The heated wing mirrors are heated while the rear window heater
⇒ page 115 and the ignition are switched on.
WARNING
• The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision
however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when
changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
A
1
A
2
Fig. 82 Detail of driver
door: wing mirror controls
A
L
A
R
23)
Optional equipment
A
A
A
L
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 119 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Lights and visibility120
• If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles
behind you.
• Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror
and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Fuel is wasted otherwise.
Note
• If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
• In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 120 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 121
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
The driver seat, front passenger seat, and seats in the passenger compart-
ment, can be adjusted in many ways to suit the physical requirements of the
vehicle occupants. The correct seat position is very important for:
• fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
• relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,
• safe driving,
• optimum protection from the seat belts and airbag system ⇒ page 7.
Vehicle seats
Your vehicle has a total of five or seven
24)
seats.
• First row of seats: two seats
• Second row of seats: three seats
• Third row of seats
24)
: two seats
Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may
sustain critical injuries.
• Never transport more people than there are seats available in the
vehicle.
• Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat
belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system. Section “Child Safety”
• The seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size
and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your
passengers with optimum protection.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never
rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This also
applies to passengers. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident.
If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain fatal injuries due to an improper
sitting position.
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect
the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury. The distance between the driver and the steering wheel or
between the front passenger and the dash panel should always be as great
as possible.
• Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is
stationary. Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury.
In addition, while adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of fatal accidents.
• Special guidelines apply to installing a child seat on the front
passenger seat. When installing a child seat, observe the warning note in
“Child safety”.
• The seats in the third row of seats may, for safety reasons, only be used
if the luggage compartment cover has been removed.
24)
Optional equipment
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 121 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage122
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head ⇒ fig. 83 and ⇒ fig. 84.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 123.
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
• Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of
a collision or accident.
• Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
• The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu-
pant's size.
Fig. 83 Front view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
Fig. 84 Side view: head
restraints and seat belts
correctly adjusted
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 122 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 123
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height
– Hold the side of the head restraint.
– Push the head restraint up (in the direction of the arrow) or push
it down with the button pressed ⇒ fig. 85 (arrow). Correct setting
⇒ page 122.
– Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in position.
Removing the head restraint
– Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 85 -arrow-.
– Pull head restraint out of fitting without releasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint into the guides on the rear backrest.
– Press and hold button ⇒ fig. 85 (arrow) and push the head
restraint down as far as it will go.
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size.
WARNING
Never drive if the head restraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
• After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for
height to achieve optimal protection.
• Please observe the safety warnings ⇒ page 122, “Correct adjustment
of head restraints”.
Fig. 85 Adjusting and
removing the head
restraints
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 123 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage124
Front seats
Adjusting front seats
The control elements ⇒ fig. 86 are mirrored for the front right-hand
seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
– Pull up the lever and move the seat forwards or backwards
⇒ .
– Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Adjusting the lumbar support
25)
– Take your weight off the backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Turning the seat
25)
– Adjust the seat surface to its lowest position and push the seat
back as far as it will go.
–On the driver's seat, adjust the backrest fully forward so that it
will not hit the steering wheel when turning the seat round.
– Lift the lever and turn the seat round ⇒ .
Adjusting the seat height
– Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages. ⇒
Adjusting the armrest
25)
– Turn the thumb wheel underneath the arm rest to adjust it to the
size of the occupant.
The curvature of the cushioned area is determined by the settings made in
the lumbar region. This supports the natural curvature of the spine very effec-
tively.
WARNING
• Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of injury. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 86 Front left seat
controls
A
1
A
1
A
2
25)
Optional equipment
A
3
A
4
A
4
A
5
A
6
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 124 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 125
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during
sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest
tilted far back. Risk of injury. The maximum protection of the seat belt can
be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the
driver and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The
further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due
to improper positioning of the belt web!
• Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/back-
wards position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due
care and attention.
• Never turn the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in
motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
position. Risk of injury. Only turn the driver or passenger seats when the
vehicle is stationary.
• When the vehicle is in motion, the rotating front seats must be securely
engaged and facing the direction of travel. These front seats may be used
only when the vehicle is stationary.
Caution
The driver seat and front passenger seat must not be occupied while they are
being turned. If the seat is occupied when it is turned, it could be damaged.
Seat heating
The seat cushions and backrests of the front seats can be
heated electrically.
– Turn the appropriate switch ⇒ fig. 87 to switch on the seat
heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left switch
controls the left seat heating and the right switch the right seat heating.
Caution
To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 87 Centre console:
Seat heating controls
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 125 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage126
Rear seats
Characteristics of seat equipment
The seats in the passenger compartment have the following features,
depending on the equipment level:
• Integrated three-point seat belt with adjustable latch plate holder,
• Integrated ISOFIX anchor points for a child seat,
• Height-adjustable head restraints ⇒ page 122,
• Room for just one person,
• Adjustable armrests
26)
,
• Individual seats can be removed ⇒ page 129,
• Integrated child seats
26)
.
Seat with integrated child seat
Seats with an integrated child seat have the same functions as the conven-
tional individual seats. The integrated child seat is described in “Safety
first”.
Seat layout
Second row, left seat.
Third row, left seat.
Second row, centre seat.
26)
Optional equipment
Fig. 88 Maximum number of seats in the Alhambra
A
1
A
2
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 126 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 127
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Second row, right seat.
27)
Third row, right seat
27)
.
Notes on the installation of the seats
• Seats and are of the same construction and thus interchangeable.
• Seats and are of the same construction and thus interchangeable.
• Seat can be installed in positions .
• Seat can be installed in place of seats , , and .
Moving seats
– Make sure that the vehicle is not on a steep slope.
– Pull the unlock lever ⇒ fig. 89 upwards, in the direction of the
arrow, and hold in this position.
– Move the seat.
– Release the lever.
– Always ensure that the seat is securely engaged.
WARNING
• Please be careful when adjusting the seat backwards and forwards!
Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and atten-
tion.
• Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise your seat
could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. This could increase
the risk of an accident and therefore injury.
• Please observe safety recommendations concerning seats
⇒ page 131.
27)
Optional equipment
A
4
A
5
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
5
A
2
A
1
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
4
A
5
Fig. 89 Adj ust me nt of the
seat forwards and back-
wards
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 127 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage128
Folding the backrest and the seat forwards
There are two ways to fold the backrest and lift the seat.
Folding the individual seat forwards
– Pull the release lever at the seat surface ⇒ fig. 90 up or press
the lever on the rear side of the seat ⇒ fig. 91 down.
– Press the backrest down until the backrest engages.
Folding seat forward
– Push the head restraint down as far as it will go ⇒ page 123.
– Fold down the backrests.
– Pull the release lever at the seating surface ⇒ fig. 90 up or
pull the loop on the rear side of the seat ⇒ fig. 91 down.
– Fold the seat forwards.
Folding seat back
– Fold the seat back until it engages in the rear floor anchorings.
– Fold back the backrest.
– Pull the seat up to ensure that it is properly engaged in the floor
anchorings
– Adjust the head restraint to suit body size.
The backrest is locked in position when folded forwards. That is why the
release lever must be either pulled or pushed again to push the backrest
up again.
Fig. 90 Side of seat: fold
the backrest and lift seat
forwards
Fig. 91 Rear of seat: fold
the backrest and lift seat
forwards
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 128 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 129
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
If you do not hold the backrest firmly when you operate the lever for
adjusting the backrest angle, the backrest will be pushed forward by
springs. Risk of injury.
• Always hold the backrest firmly when you adjust the backrest angle.
• Please observe safety recommendations concerning seats
⇒ page 131.
Removing and fitting individual seats
The seats can be fitted and removed more easily by two
people than by one person.
Removing an individual seat
– Push the head restraint down as far as it will go ⇒ page 123.
– Fold down the backrests ⇒ page 128.
–Fold the seat forwards ⇒ page 128.
– When removing a seat in the third row
28)
, push the seat back as
far as it will go and forwards as far as it will go when removing a
seat in the second row.
– Push the two bars ⇒ fig. 92 under the seat together in the direc-
tion of the arrow and lift the seat out of the floor anchorings.
Assembling seat
– Push the bars underneath the seat together in the direction of
the arrow and hold them in this position.
Fig. 92 Bar for removing
and installing the indi-
vidual seat
28)
Optional equipment
Fig. 93 Assembling seat:
bar and retaining bolts
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 129 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage130
– Place the seat frame ⇒ page 129, fig. 93 between the
retaining bolts in the floor anchorings and release both bars.
– Pull the seat up to ensure that it is properly engaged in the front
floor anchorings
– Fold the seat back until it engages in the rear floor anchorings.
– Fold the backrest back and adjust the head restraint to suit body
size.
Covers for the floor anchorings
After removing the seats in the passenger compartment, it is possible to fix
covers to the floor anchorings to stop dirt getting into them, for example. You
will receive 12 covers delivered with the vehicle.
Guide the cover into the floor anchoring and press it in.
The covers will have to be removed by levering them off with the vehicle key
before you can install the seats.
WARNING
Please observe safety recommendations concerning seats ⇒ page 131.
Armrests
A
A
A
B
Fig. 94 Removable
armrest: button
Fig. 95 Protective bag for
the removable armrests
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 130 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 131
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Adjusting the armrest
– Turn the thumb wheel underneath the armrests to adjust the
angle of the armrests to your requirement.
Removable armrest*
29)
– Take hold of the armrest at the rear and press the button
⇒ page 130, fig. 94 in the direction of the arrow.
– With the button pressed, pull the armrest off to the side out of the
holder.
–When installing, please ensure that the armrest engages
securely in the holder.
The removable armrests for the second row of seats can be found in a trans-
port bag ⇒ page 130, fig. 95.
The bag hangs from a head restraint of a seat in the last row of seats or, in
vehicles with 4 integrated child seats
29)
, on the centre seat of the second row
of seats.
WARNING
• The transport bag should always be secured properly when travelling in
the vehicle as it could otherwise be a safety risk in an accident or braking
manoeuvre. We recommend that you keep the bag at home.
• The bag, if you do decide to keep it in the vehicle, may not be secured
to the head restraint of an integrated child seat. The backrest could be
forced forward in an accident or braking manoeuvre due to the weight of the
bag.
Safety instructions for seats
WARNING
• Occupants may travel on the seats in the passenger compartment only
if the following conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
− The seats must always be fitted in the appropriate floor anchorings
and must be securely engaged.
− The backrest of all seats must be in the upright position and securely
engaged in this position.
− The seat occupants must have access to the seat belts. The seat
belts must be fitted correctly.
− All the occupants of the vehicle must be correctly seated while
driving.
• A seat which has been removed can cause injury if it is transported in
the vehicle. Each seat must always be fitted in the floor anchorings and
must be securely engaged. The backrest must be in an upright position. If
a bench seat is not properly secured, it could become a life-threatening
hazard for all vehicle occupants.
• Make sure that the seat feet of seats are not soiled or damaged when
removed from the vehicle.
• All adjustment to the seats, including fitting and removal, may be
carried out only when the vehicle is stationary.
29)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 131 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage132
Some seat settings for the Alhambra
Examples of how the seating layout can be altered.
Of course, the illustrations show only some of the many seat combinations
possible in the Alhambra. You can, for example, purchase corresponding
retainers for your bicycle from SEAT Service. That means you will be able to
protect your bicycles from both theft and the weather when transporting
them.
Or you turn
30)
the driver and front passenger seats 180° to use the Alhambra
as a conference room or breakfast room. Or you can easily remove the seats
in the third row
30)
in order to travel with a lot of luggage.
WARNING
• Luggage and other items in the luggage or passenger compartment can
be thrown forward in a braking manoeuvre. Please ensure that these items
are secured properly.
• Do not release the backrest of a seat in the second row when folding a
seat in the third row of seats forwards. Serious injuries can occur if a back-
rest has not been properly engaged in position.
Fig. 96 Alhambra loaded
with luggage.
Fig. 97 Alhambra trans-
formed into conference
room
30)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 132 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 133
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever ⇒ fig. 98. It is locked
when the key slot* is horizontal.
Vehicle wallet compartment
The vehicle wallet should always be kept in the glove compartment.
Cooling the stowage compartment on the front passenger side
There is an air outlet on the right of the rear panel ⇒ fig. 98. If the air condi-
tioning is switched on, cooled air can be fed into the compartment. Turn the
air vent to open and close it.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in
motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or
in the event of an accident.
Central stowage on instrument panel
To open stowage compartment, press on the part closest to the air vents
(dotted area) in the direction of the arrow, this opens by spring action
⇒ fig. 99.
To close , lower the cover by hand until it is completely closed.
Fig. 98 Passenger side:
stowage compartment
Fig. 99 Central stowage
on instrument panel
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 133 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage134
Upper right stowage on instrument panel
To open, press as shown by arrow ⇒ fig. 100. The stowage compartment
opens by spring action.
To close , lower the cover by hand until it is completely closed.
Stowage compartment on centre console*
Some versions of the model may include a stowage compartment between
the radio and the Climatronic.
Fig. 100 Upper right
stowage on instrument
panel
Fig. 101 Stowage
compartment on centre
console
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 134 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 135
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Stowage compartment in the luggage compartment
On the right there is a stowage compartment which can be used to store the
hazard warning triangles for example.
To open, pull cover in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 102.
To close, push cover in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 102.
Other stowage areas
Further stowage facilities can be found in the front passenger door ⇒ fig. 104
as well as in the roof ⇒ fig. 103 in vehicles with a curtain airbag
31)
.
Fig. 102 Stowage
compartment in the
luggage compartment
A
1
A
2
Fig. 103 Stowage area in
the roof
Fig. 104 Stowage are in
the driver door
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 135 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage136
Coat hooks are located in the roof. They are integrated in the grab handles in
the passenger compartment.
Location of CD changer
31)
The CD changer, which can be factory fitted, is located either in the dash
panel or in the right-hand stowage compartment in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
• Ensure that no objects can fall from the dash panel or other stowage
areas into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
accelerator. Risk of accident.
• Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not restrict the driver's view.
Risk of accident. The coat hooks are intended only for use with light arti-
cles of clothing. Do not leave any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging
articles of clothing. During sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe-
cially those involving airbag deployment, these objects could injure the
vehicle occupants.
Cup holders
In the centre console: there are two cup holders
Opening cup holder
– Press the symbol on the cup holder briefly. The spring mecha-
nism will release the holder.
Closing the cup holder
– Push the cup holder up in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 105
until it engages.
WARNING
Improper use of the cup holders can cause injury.
• For reasons of safety, the cup holders should be used only for standard
drinks cans and bottles with a maximum capacity of 0.5 litres.
31)
Optional equipment
Fig. 105 Cupholder in the
centre console
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 136 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 137
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden
driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
spilled. Danger of scalding.
• Ensure, when driving, that no can or other object is dropped in the
driver footwell, as it could get under the pedals and obstruct their working.
In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able
to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
• Never leave closed drinks cans in direct sunlight for any length of time.
If the inside temperature is high they could explode.
Caution
When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be
spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Note
There is no left-hand cup holder on vehicles fitted with a hands-free tele-
phone system
32)
.
Folding table
Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests.
Folding out the folding table
– Fold the table up in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 106 until it
engages.
Folding the table back
– Push the table down in the opposite direction of the arrow
⇒ fig. 106 until it engages.
32)
Optional equipment
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 106 Folding table on
right-hand front seat
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 137 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage138
WARNING
The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion
and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury
during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed
and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Clothes hangers
Removing the clothes hanger
– Remove the head restraint ⇒ page 123.
– Pull the clothes hanger
33)
off the rods of the head restraint
⇒ fig. 107.
WARNING
• The hanger must never be attached to the head restraint of a seat used
by children, as the head restraint does not engage completely and will
come off in the event of an accident.
• A hanger may only be fitted on a head restraint when no-one is seated
in the seat behind. In the event of an accident, it could cause injury.
Caution
The clothes hangers should only be secured on the driver and front
passenger seats and not on the seats in the passenger compartment. The
side trim will otherwise be damaged when folding the seats backwards and
forwards.
Net bag for small objects
33)
Optional equipment
Fig. 107 Clothes hangers
on the front seat
Fig. 108 Net bag on seats
in second row
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 138 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 139
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The seats in the second row are fitted with a net bag ⇒ page 138, fig. 108 for
the stowage of small objects.
The bag will hold a newspaper, can or standard bottle of up to a maximum of
0.5 litres ⇒ .
WARNING
• Ensure, when driving, that no can or other object is dropped in the
driver footwell, as it could get under the pedals and obstruct their working.
In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able
to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and electrical
sockets
Front ashtray
Opening and closing the ashtray
– To open move the ashtray cover ⇒ fig. 109 forwards (arrow),
until it engages.
– To close, push the cover down as far as it will go.
Emptying the ashtray
– To remove the ashtray insert, pull it to the front until it engages.
– Take out the ashtray.
No-smoking versions of the vehicle have a stowage compartment in place of
the ashtray.
WARNING
• Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the
ashtray.
Fig. 109 Front ashtray
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 139 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage140
Rear ashtrays
Emptying the rear door ashtrays
– Open the ashtray and remove the interior of the ashtray.
WARNING
• Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the
ashtray.
Cigarette lighter
–Open the ashtray ⇒ page 139, fig. 109.
– Press the lighter button ⇒ fig. 111 inwards ⇒ .
– Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the
glowing coil.
No-smoking versions of the vehicle are fitted with a 12 volt socket in place of
the lighter ⇒ page 141.
WARNING
• Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
a fire.
Fig. 110 Rear ashtray
Fig. 111 Cigarette lighter
in the ashtray
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 140 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 141
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Take care when using the cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence
when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns, risk of injury.
• The cigarette lighter also works when the ignition is off and when the
ignition key is removed. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children unsu-
pervised in the vehicle.
Sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Socket in the centre console
The 12 Volt socket in the stowage area or the 12 Volt socket of the cigarette
lighter
34)
can be used for further electrical consumers with a power rating of
up to 120 Watt.
Socket, luggage compartment
34)
Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12-volt socket in the luggage
compartment ⇒ fig. 112 The appliances connected to each socket must not
exceed a power rating of 120 Watt.
The socket is supplied with electricity from the additional battery on vehicles
equipped with an additional battery
34)
WARNING
The electrical sockets and any appliances connected to them are also func-
tional with the ignition switched off and the key removed. Improper use of
the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a
fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Note
• Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off will drain the
battery.
• Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions on
⇒ page 202.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 112 Socket, luggage
compartment
34)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 141 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage142
AUX-IN Input
General notes
The AUX-IN socket is found on the centre console, next to the
gearbox lever.
The external audio sources connected to the AUX-IN socket will only be played
through the radio loudspeakers or the radio and navigation system. The
external audio sources can not be operated through the radio or the radio and
navigation system.
For operating the external audio source, consult the instructions manual of
the manufacturer in question.
If you wish, you can select whenever you want another audio source at the
radio or the radio and navigation system. While the external audio source is
not switched off, it will be playing as background.
Take into account that the equipment does not change to the last selected
audio source on finishing the reproduction of the external audio source. The
radio or the radio and navigation system remain in the AUX menu. Another
radio source must be selected manually.
For the AUX-IN socket you need a 3.5 jack connector. If the external audio
source does not have this type of connector, an adapter should be used.
WARNING
The objects which are not attached inside the vehicle could hinder the
driver and cause severe injuries in the event of sharp braking or accident.
• The external audio source must not be placed on the instrument panel
in any case. A sharp manoeuvre can throw the device towards the compart-
ment and injure the vehicle passengers.
• The external audio source must not be assembled in any case near the
airbag. See chapter “Airbag system”. A sharp manoeuvre can throw the
device towards the compartment and injure the vehicle passengers.
• The external audio source must not be held in hand or on the legs while
driving. A sharp manoeuvre can throw the device towards the compartment
and injure the vehicle passengers.
• Place the external audio source cables so that they are not in the way
while driving.
Note
If the external audio source is connected to the vehicle with the 12-volt power
point, jamming may occur while playing with some adapters.
Fig. 113 AUX-IN socket
location
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 142 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 143
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Hazard warning triangles and first aid kit
Warning triangle
The hazard warning triangle may be fitted in the bracket behind the right trim
of the luggage compartment.
Note
The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
First-aid kit
In the bracket located behind the right hand trim in the luggage compartment
there is space for a standard first aid kit and the hazard warning triangle.
For reasons of space, in vehicles fitted with a removable tow bar
35)
the
bracket only holds a smaller first aid kit and the hazard warning triangle.
Note
• In some vehicles the first aid kit bracket is behind the left hand trim in the
luggage compartment.
• The first aid kit is not issued as a standard feature with the vehicle.
• The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
• Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should
purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
first-aid kit has expired.
• Before buying accessories and replacement parts, refer to the note
“Accessories, modifications and renewal of parts”.
Luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
– If necessary, remove the seats to increase the load area.
– Distribute the load as evenly as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
– Place and stow heavy objects directly on the floor of the vehicle.
If possible they should be positioned above or in front of the rear
axle.
– Drive particularly carefully if you are transporting heavy objects
⇒ page 145.
– Use suitable straps to secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
rings ⇒ page 144.
– If objects protrude over the end of the vehicle, you must draw the
attention of other road users to this. Observe legal requirements
when doing so.
When driving with the tailgate open, please observe the instructions on
⇒ page 99.
35)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 143 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage144
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can cause
serious injuries.
• Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on
the fastening rings.
• Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of
fatal injury.
• Remember that transporting heavy objects modifies the driving condi-
tions as the centre of gravity has been altered. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly,
to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the
allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment closing the door
behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal
risk.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
both the tailgate and all the doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the
vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every
passenger must be properly belted in.
Caution
• Avoid overloading small areas by placing heavy objects on the vehicle
floor.
• The wires of the heating element in the rear window and the window aerial
in the rear side windows could be damaged if objects on the luggage
compartment cover rub against them.
• If you have removed the seats from the passenger compartment, you
should place a large, robust covering over the floor anchorings to prevent
damage.
Note
• Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
• Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There are fastening rings in the luggage compartment which
can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
– Always use suitable undamaged belts for fastening the luggage
or any other object tot he anchorage rings ⇒ in “Loading the
luggage compartment” on page 143.
The retainers for the detachable seat belts for the third row of seats and the
floor anchorings for the seats can be used as fastening rings for items of
luggage.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 144 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 145
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of “kinetic
energy” depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with
inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event
of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
• To prevent pieces of luggage or other objects from flying forward,
always use appropriate retaining cords which are secured to the fastening
rings.
• Never secure a child seat on the fastening rings.
Loading heavy objects
Special care is required when loading heavy objects and
when driving a vehicle which contains heavy objects.
Observe the following points to prevent damage and accidents:
– If necessary, remove the seats to increase the load area.
– Before loading the vehicle place a sturdy mat or similar cover
flush on floor of the vehicle.
– Where necessary, do not cover protruding parts of the vehicle
floor.
– Protect the seat anchor points from damage.
– Avoid overloading small areas - spread the load.
– Use suitable straps to secure the objects to retaining rings.
– Drive particularly carefully and think ahead.
– If possible, avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres.
WARNING
For safety reasons, you should read and observe all information on loading
the vehicle ⇒ page 145.
Caution
• If you have removed the seats from the passenger compartment, you
should place a large, robust covering over the seat rails to prevent damage.
• Avoid overloading small areas - spread the load.
Safety notes on loading the vehicle
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can cause
serious injuries.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 145 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage146
• Always stow objects safely in the vehicle and secure them on the
fastening rings if necessary.
• Use suitable specialist straps to secure heavy objects.
• Loose objects in the vehicle can move suddenly. As the centre of gravity
moves, safety is impaired and the vehicle becomes difficult to handle.
• During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk of
fatal injury.
• Remember that transporting heavy objects modifies the driving condi-
tions as the centre of gravity has been altered. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly,
to avoid accidents.
• Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the
allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and
damage to the vehicle.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended, especially when the tailgate is
open. Children could climb into the interior of the vehicle closing the door
behind them; they will remain trapped without help and there is a mortal
risk.
• Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all
windows, the tailgate and all doors when you leave the vehicle.
• Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. Every
passenger must be properly belted in.
Luggage compartment cover
The luggage compartment cover protects your luggage from
prying eyes.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 114 Luggage
compartment cover::
holders on the right
Fig. 115 Luggage
compartment cover::
holders on the right
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 146 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 147
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Opening the luggage compartment cover
– After fitting the luggage compartment cover, pull the handle on
the cover back and hook in the cover on the side.
Removing the luggage compartment cover
– Press the unlock button (with the luggage compartment cover
rolled up) ⇒ page 146, fig. 114 in the direction of the arrow
and remove the cover from the right holder upwards.
– Remove the cover from the left holder in the direction of the arrow
and remove from the vehicle.
Fitting the luggage compartment cover
– Push the luggage compartment cover to the stop in the direction
of the arrow ⇒ page 146, fig. 115 into the left-hand holder.
– Press the cover down into the right-hand holder until it engages
in position.
Light items of clothing or other objects on the luggage compartment cover
can restrict visibility through the rear window.
WARNING
• Never leave hard, heavy or sharp objects on the shelf (unrolled) or in the
pockets of clothing on the luggage compartment cover. Animals must
never be allowed onto the luggage compartment cover. During a sudden
braking or driving manoeuvre or an accident, these objects and animals
endanger all vehicle occupants.Risk of injury.
Caution
The wires of the heating element in the rear window and the window aerial in
the rear side windows could be damaged if objects on the luggage compart-
ment cover rub against them.
Net bag*
– To remove the net bag unhook the six hooks ⇒ fig. 116 (arrows).
The net bag behind the last row of seats is used to store light items of
luggage. The net partition can prevent items of luggage from being thrown
forward into the vehicle in sudden braking manoeuvres or in accidents.
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 116 Net partition
fitted in the vehicle
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 147 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage148
WARNING
Always fit the net partition carefully, observing the instructions. Risk of
injury.
• Heavy, pointed or sharp items which are not stowed securely can cause
injury in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents, even if the
net bag is correctly assembled.
• For reasons of safety, vehicle occupants must not travel behind a fitted
safety net.
Roof carrier
Safety notes on using the roof carrier
The roof carrier system must always be installed exactly
according to the instructions provided.
• Your vehicle has special roof rails on the right and left for fitting the
mounts. Therefore, standard roof carriers cannot be used.
• The mounts are the basis of a complete roof carrier system. Special
fixtures must then be added in order to safely transport luggage, bicycles,
skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. All these system components are avail-
able from SEAT Service. We recommend you use genuine SEAT roof carrier
systems. If you wish to use a different roof carrier, make sure that it can be
fitted securely to your vehicle and that it cannot damage your vehicle.
• We recommend that you keep the assembly instructions provided by the
roof carrier manufacturer in your vehicle wallet.
• Only the fitted retainers may be used to secure the carrier feet on vehicles
without a roof railing. These retainers are located underneath the plastic rain
channel between the markings.
• In vehicles with roof edging
36)
, the basic supports can be fitted on the
edge making sure to adapt the distance between the supports to the objects
to be carried. On vehicles with a sliding/tilting roof
36)
, however, the front
carrier may not be fitted near the rear edge of the sliding/tilting roof when the
roof is open.
When should the roof carrier be removed?
• When it is not needed (to save fuel, reduce wind noise and avoid theft).
• Before cleaning in an automatic car wash.
WARNING
• If you do not use mounts approved by SEAT or fail to fit them according
to instructions, the load or the roof carrier itself may fall off the vehicle roof
and onto the street. Risk of accident or injury.
• The risk of an accident is increased by transporting heavy or bulky
loads on the roof, which affects the car's handling by shifting the centre of
gravity and increasing susceptibility to cross winds. Both circumstances
increase the risk of accident. Therefore you must adapt your driving style
and speed to the prevailing conditions - avoid sudden braking or driving
manoeuvres when there is a load on the roof carrier.
• The roof carrier system must always be installed exactly according to
the instructions provided.
Caution
• Check all bolted connections and fastenings for the roof carrier system
before every trip. If necessary, tighten bolted connections and check the
system at regular, appropriate intervals, e.g. at each stop during a long trip.
• The height of your vehicle is changed by the installation of the roof carrier
and the load secured on it. Bear this in mind when driving through garage
doors or low underpasses – there is danger of damage to the vehicle.
36)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 148 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 149
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Damage to the vehicle caused by incorrect installation of mounts or roof
carrier systems not approved by the factory are excluded from the vehicle
warranty.
Securing the load
Loads transported on the roof carrier must be securely
attached. The car's handling is affected when transporting
loads.
The maximum permissible roof load for your vehicle is 75 kg. The load limit
applies to the combined weight of the carrier system and the load itself.
Distribute the load evenly. However, if you are using a roof carrier with a lower
weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum roof load. Do not
exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the
fitting instructions.
WARNING
• If damaged, fine or inadequate securing straps are used to fasten
objects carried on the roof, they could break in the event of sharp braking.
This could cause an accident and serious injury.
• Always use appropriate securing straps to secure objects on the roof
carrier against sliding or flying off.,This could cause an accident. The load
must be correctly secured.
• Always respect the maximum authorised weight for the roof, the
maximum authorised weight on the axles and the total maximum author-
ised weight of the vehicle. Otherwise there is danger of causing an acci-
dent.
• The risk of an accident is increased by transporting heavy or bulky
loads on the roof, which affects the car's handling by shifting the centre of
gravity and increasing susceptibility to cross winds. Both circumstances
increase the risk of accident. Therefore you must adapt your driving style
and speed to the prevailing conditions - avoid sudden braking or driving
manoeuvres when there is a load on the roof carrier.
Caution
Please take extra care not to let the tailgate or rear window strike the roof load
when open – there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
The roof carrier is often left on the roof for convenience even if it is not being
used. However, increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more
fuel. For this reason you should always take off the roof carrier when it is not
in use.
Cooling and heating box*
Notes on usage
The cooling and heating box may only be installed in the posi-
tion of rear left seat in the third row.
Power can be supplied by any of the 12 Volt sockets in the vehicle. It
consumes approximately 33 watts and has a capacity of approximately 32
litres.
The battery will discharge if the cooling and heating box is used for a long
period while the engine is switched off.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 149 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage150
Before using the cooling and heating box for the first time, you should clean
it using a household detergent.
Disconnect the power supply and clean the box if you do not plan to use the
cooling and heating box for a long period. Place a folded towel between the
box and its lid. This prevents mould and damp stains forming in the cooling
and heating box.
Whenever possible, food and drinks should be stored in air-tight containers
in the box.
Do not overfill the box - this would prevent air circulation within the box.
Place crumpled paper (or similar) between bottles and other containers in the
box to prevent clanking noises.
Do not fill the interior of the box with liquid or ice.
Caution
• Do not place objects, blankets, or clothes on top of the cooling/heating
box, as the air intake and output may be obstructed and the box will discon-
nect itself.
• Do not place any containers, food items or other objects into the box if
they are warmer than +50 °C. This could damage the cooling and heating box.
• The cold/hot box is not suitable for transporting corrosive material or
material containing solvents.
• Never leave the cold/hot box in the rain or damp.
Note
• The cooling and heating box is not designed to heat or cool the interior of
the vehicle. The cooling and heating box should be used only for cooling and
warming food and drinks and for transporting heat-sensitive items on short
journeys.
• A corresponding manual for the installation and use of the cooling and
heating box is included by the manufacturer and should be kept with the
vehicle wallet.
Cooling or heating
The contents of the cooling and heating box can be cooled or
kept warm.
Switching on the cooling function
– Insert the cable plug in the cooling and heating box so that the
blue marking on the plug is pointing to the notch.
– Insert the connector cable plug into one of the vehicle's 12 volt
sockets.
– Keep the lid of the cooling and heating box closed.
Fig. 117 Cooling and
heating box as installed
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 150 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Seats and stowage 151
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Switching on the heating function
– Insert the cable plug in the cooling and heating box so that the
red marking on the plug is pointing to the notch.
– Insert the connector cable plug into one of the vehicle's 12 volt
sockets.
– Keep the lid of the cooling and heating box closed.
Switching the cooling and heating box off fully
– Disconnect the power supply to the 12 Volt socket.
The internal temperature of the cooling and heating box is dependent on the
temperature in the vehicle. In cooling mode, the internal temperature can be
max. 20 degrees below the temperature in the vehicle. In heating mode it can
be max. 35 degrees above the temperature in the vehicle ⇒ in “Safety
notes on using the cooling and heating box” on page 151.
If you switch directly from cooling to heating (or vice versa) it will take a rela-
tively long time for the interior to reach the desired temperature.
Faults
If the cooling and heating box does not work, proceed as follows:
• Check whether there is power and whether the plug is securely in the
socket.
• Make sure the power cable is not damaged.
• Check the fuse for the power supply to the 12 Volt socket.
• Run the engine to recharge the battery.
If these steps do not help, contact a qualified dealership.
Safety notes on using the cooling and heating box
WARNING
• For reasons of safety, the cooling and heating box lid must always be
closed and latched when the vehicle is in motion. The cooling and heating
box must always be firmly secured in the correct floor anchorings.
• If the temperature in the vehicle is too low, the temperature in the box
may fall below +2 degrees and the contents may freeze. Bottles and other
containers could burst. Risk of injury.
• For reasons of safety, the cooling and heating box lid must not be used
as a table or shelf when the vehicle is in motion.
• Always close the lid of the cooling and heating box before the vehicle
moves off. If the flap is open, it could drop down when the vehicle moves
off. Risk of injury.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 151 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning152
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Climatronic
Controls
The Climatronic maintains the selected vehicle temperature automatically.
The cooling system only works when the engine is running and the
blower is switched on.
– To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button
⇒ fig. 118.
The temperature and the blower can be controlled individually at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
Button – defrost function for the windscreen. The air recirculation
and ECON mode are switched off and the windscreen heating
37)
is
switched on. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the
windscreen.
Display of the blower setting for the front
Display:
− AUTO (automatic mode) or
Fig. 118 Instrument panel: Climatronic controls
37)
Optional equipment
A
1
A
2
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 152 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
− ECON (cooling system off) or
− OFF (entire system off)
Outside temperature display
Display for windscreen defrosting – lights up when the windscreen
defrosting function is switched on
Display for air recirculation mode
Display for air flow
Display of the selected interior temperature front
Display of the blower setting rear
Display of the selected interior temperature rear
Button for the automatic mode
Button for air recirculation mode
Button for reducing the blower speed front
Button for raising the blower speed front
Button for directing the air flow to the chest
Button for directing the air flow to the footwell
Button for reducing the temperature front
Button for raising the temperature front
Button for reducing the blower speed rear
Button for raising the blower speed rear
Button for reducing the temperature rear
Button for raising the temperature rear
Button for switching the cooling system off
Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit
Press and hold the button and press the button.
The selected temperature unit is then displayed.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with
the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the
demist/defrost functions for the windows.
Note
Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 158.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, flow, and distribution are
automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
Switching on automatic mode
– Press the button .
– Select the desired temperature We recommend 22°C (72°F).
A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of
+22°C (72°F) is set in automatic mode. It can be changed as necessary to suit
individual preferences or particular circumstances. It is possible to select
interior temperatures from +18°C (64°F) to +29°C (86°F). These are approxi-
mate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or
lower depending on the outside conditions.
If a temperature below +18°C (17.78°C) is selected, the display switches to
LO The temperature is not controlled and in AUTO mode, the system runs at
maximum cooling output.
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11 AUTO
A
12
A
13
A
14
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
18
A
19
A
20
A
21
A
22
A
23 ECON
ECON AUTO
AUTO
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 153 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154
If a temperature above +29°C (86°F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not controlled.
Climatronic maintains a constant temperature level fully automatically. This is
done by automatically adjusting the temperature of the air supplied to the
interior, the blower setting, and the air distribution. The system also allows
for the effect of strong sunlight, so there is no need for manual adjustment.
Therefore, automatic mode provides the best comfort for the vehicle occu-
pants in virtually all conditions throughout the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an adjustment is made using the
buttons for air distribution or blower. The temperature continues to be regu-
lated.
Note
In the automatic mode, at least one outlet in the instrument panel must be
open. The cooling system could otherwise ice over.
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, flow, and distribution yourself.
Switching on manual mode
– Press one of the air distribution buttons ⇒ fig. 119 or
several times, or one of the temperature buttons or .
is deleted from the display.
Fig. 119 Instrument panel: Climatronic controls
A
15
A
16
A
17
A
18 AUTO
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 154 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Temperature
The selected temperature setting is shown on the display. It is possible to
select interior temperatures from +18°C (64°F) to +29°C (86°F). These are
approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher
or lower depending on the outside conditions.
If a temperature below +18°C (17.78°C) is selected, the display switches to
LO The temperature is not controlled and in AUTO mode, the system runs at
maximum cooling output.
If a temperature above +29°C (86°F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not controlled.
Blower
The blower can be adjusted gradually using the controls y . Always
have the blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air
into the vehicle. If the blower is set to 0, the Climatronic is switched off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air outlets separately.
Switching off the cooling system
Pressing the button switches off the air cooling system to save fuel.
The temperature continues to be controlled, but the air cannot be cooled. The
set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the outside
temperature.
Switching the Climatronic on/off
Press button until OFF is shown on display . The Climatronic is switched
off. This function should be used in certain situations only (e.g. if the system
develops a fault).
The Climatronic is switched back on by pressing button .
WARNING
When the Climatronic is off open a window to ensure an adequate supply of
fresh air in the vehicle. Otherwise, when the Climatronic is switched off, no
fresh air enters the vehicle. Stale or contaminated air inside the vehicle
may cause drowsiness, increasing the risk of accident.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from entering the vehicle.
– Press the button ⇒ page 154, fig. 119 to switch air recircula-
tion mode on or off. This is ON if the symbol is displayed
on the screen.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic.
When the outside temperature is low, using air recirculation mode provides
more effective heating by heating air from the vehicle interior instead of cold
air from outside.
When the outside temperature is high, using air recirculation mode provides
more effective cooling by cooling air from the vehicle interior instead of warm
air from outside.
ECON
A
13
A
3
AUTO
A
12
A
6
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 155 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156
WARNING
Do not leave the air recirculation function on for long periods. In air recircu-
lation mode, no fresh air enters the vehicle interior. Also, if the cooling
system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Stale or contam-
inated air inside the vehicle may cause drowsiness, increasing the risk of
accident.
Climatronic for the passenger compartment
Setting the blower speed for the passenger compartment
– The temperature is selected with buttons ⇒ fig. 120 and .
It remains stored until another temperature is selected.
Setting the blower speed for the passenger compartment
– Buttons and are used to lower or raise the blower speed
and thus adjust the air volume.
The Climatronic for the rear works only in air recirculation mode. Fresh air is
not drawn into the vehicle.
Fig. 120 Instrument panel: Climatronic controls
A
21
A
22
A
19
A
20
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 156 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The Climatronic can be fitted either with or without an additional cooling
system
38)
for the passenger compartment.
Climatronic for the passenger compartment without additional cooling
system
The temperature setting for the rear can be max. 3°C higher than the temper-
ature in the passenger compartment. A lower temperature can not be set.
If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be heated,
it activates the additional heat exchanger. The air outlets on the floor guide
warm air into the vehicle ⇒ page 157.
If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be cooled,
cooled air is fed into the vehicle via the air outlets in the front of the vehicle
only ⇒ page 157.
Climatronic for the passenger compartment with additional cooling system
The temperature setting for the rear can be max. 3 °C lower than the temper-
ature in the passenger compartment.
If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be heated,
it activates the additional heat exchanger. The air outlets on the floor guide
warm air into the vehicle ⇒ page 157.
If the Climatronic detects that the passenger compartment has to be cooled,
cooled air is fed into the rear of the vehicle via the open air outlets in the roof
⇒ page 157.
Air outlets in the passenger compartment
Air outlets for heating the passenger compartment
The air outlets ⇒ fig. 121 for the passenger compartment heating system are
located at the bottom of the left side panel at the rear.
38)
Optional equipment
Fig. 121 Air outlets for
heating the passenger
compartment
Fig. 122 Cold air vents in
the roof
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 157 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158
Air vents in the roof
In vehicles with a second cooling system
39)
for ventilating the passenger
compartment, an air outlet is fitted in the roof above each rear seat
⇒ fig. 122.
The air outlets in the roof can be opened and closed individually and
adjusted by moving the grid.
Each air outlet has two thumb wheels. The left thumb wheel can be used to
open and close the air outlet. The right thumb wheel can be used to direct the
air towards the head and chest.
WARNING
Never leave objects, food or medicines in front of the air outlets in the rear
seats. The hot air could damage or destroy heat-sensitive objects, food or
medicines.
Caution
Do not use the area in front of the outlets to store objects. This could cause
the blower to overheat and switch off. The blower could also be damaged.
Note
In the cooling mode, at least one air outlet in the roof must be open. The
cooling system could otherwise ice over.
General notes
The pollution filter
The pollution filter serves as a barrier against impurities in the ambient air (
e.g.dust and pollen).
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high
levels of air pollution, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than
stated in the Service Schedule.
Instructions for use
If the air conditioning or Climatronic
40)
is not switched on for a long period,
deposits on the evaporator can cause unpleasant smells. To prevent these
odours, the cooling system should be run at the highest blower setting at
least once a month when temperatures are over +5°C. Briefly open a window
at the same time.
Faults in the operation of the air conditioning
There is a fault if the all the symbols in the Climatronic flash for approx. 15
seconds when the ignition is switched on. Contact a specialist workshop.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
• the engine is not running.
• The blower is switched off.
• The outside temperature is lower than +5°C.
• the cooling system compressor has been temporarily switched off
because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The air conditioning fuse is faulty.
39)
Optional equipment
40)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 158 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
ified workshop.
WARNING
Please note that when the Climatronic is switched off, no fresh air will enter
the vehicle interior. For this reason you should ensure that sufficient fresh
air is able to enter the vehicle by opening a window or the sliding/tilting
sunroof
40)
when the Climatronic is switched off.
Caution
• If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch off the air
conditioning with button to prevent further damage and have it
checked by a qualified workshop.
• Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali-
fied workshop should problems occur.
Note
• If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa-
tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under-
neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect
a leak.
• Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the
windows misting over.
• The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows
and the sliding /tilting roof
40)
closed. However, if the sun has heated up the
vehicle, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for
a short period.
• Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
cooling system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a permanent
unpleasant odour.
ECON
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 159 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving160
Driving
Address
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
– Adjust the driver seat to the correct position.
– Push the lever under the steering column ⇒ fig. 123 down
⇒ .
– Adjust the steering wheel in this way until the correct position is
set ⇒ fig. 124.
– Then push the lever up again firmly ⇒ .
WARNING
• Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incor-
rect seating position can result in serious injury.
• To avoid accidents, the steering column should be adjusted only when
the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident.
Fig. 123 Adjusting the
steering wheel position
Fig. 124 Proper sitting
position for driver
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 160 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 161
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at
least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your breast bone ⇒ page 160,
fig. 124. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not
protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
• If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the
minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The
Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica-
tions are necessary.
• If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the
driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make
sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
• When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the
steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in
the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases,
you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
The Electronic Stabilisation Programme (ESP) contains the electronic differ-
ential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (TCS). The ESP works
together with the anti-locking brake system (ABS). Both warning lamps will
light up if the ESP or ABS systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatically when the engine is started.
In specific circumstances where you require less traction, you can switch off
the ESP by pressing button ⇒ fig. 125 .
For example:
• when driving with snow chains,
• when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 125 Detailed view of
dash panel ESP button
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 161 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving162
• when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer
need wheel spin.
The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. This means
that this technology is not available for as long as the ESP remains switched
off.
When does the inscription OFF light up on the button?
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
WARNING
• The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of
physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet
roads and when towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you
into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
• Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition key
Ignition switched off, steering lock
In position ⇒ fig. 126 the ignition is switched off, and the steering wheel
lock can be engaged.
To engage the steering wheel lock, take out the key and turn the wheel
slightly until you hear the pin engage. You should always lock the steering
wheel when you leave your vehicle. This makes vehicle theft more difficult
⇒ .
Switching on the ignition or glow plug system
Turn the ignition key to this position and let go of the key. If the key cannot be
turned or is difficult to turn from position to position , move the
steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key
turns freely.
ESP
Fig. 126 Ignition key
positions
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 162 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 163
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to
the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
• Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition
key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk
of accident!
• Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle,
even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially
important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle, they
could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as
the windows possibly resulting in an accident.
• Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started
or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can
result in serious injury.
Caution
The starter must not be used unless the vehicle is at a standstill (key position
). If the starter is used as soon as the engine is switched off, the starter or
the engine could be damaged.
Safety interlock for ignition key
The ignition key can only be taken out of the ignition lock if the
selector lever is in position P.
After switching off the ignition, you can remove the ignition key only if the
automatic gearbox gear selector lever ⇒ page 168 is in position P. The
selector lever is blocked after the ignition key has been removed.
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you take the key
out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with the correct
code.
Note
The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
A
3
A
1
A
3
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 163 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving164
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting a petrol engine
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
the correct code.
– Place the gear in neutral (if it is an automatic gearbox, place the
gear lever in P or in N).
– In vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal fully
and hold it in this position, the starter will then only have to turn
the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 162, fig. 126 to start
the engine.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
You may need to press the accelerator briefly after starting a very hot engine.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve lifters. This is
quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about
10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not
start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause people
to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Observe the warnings in the
chapter Help with Ignition.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine by running it with the car stationary. You should
drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine reach oper-
ating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting a diesel engine
The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with
the correct code.
– Place the gear in neutral (if it is an automatic gearbox, place the
gear lever in P or in N).
A
3
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 164 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 165
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– In vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the clutch pedal fully
and hold it in this position, the starter will then only have to turn
the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 162, fig. 126 . The
warning lamp
lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating the engine.
– When the warning lamp goes out, turn the key to position to
start the engine. Do not press the accelerator.
– Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts, the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve lifters. This is
quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If you have problems starting the engine, please refer to Help with Ignition.
Glow plug system
To avoid unnecessary loads on the battery, do not use any other major elec-
trical equipment while the glow plugs are preheating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp goes out.
Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. This is because air
needs to be bled from the fuel system while starting.
WARNING
• Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The
exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless
poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause people
to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.
• Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
• Never use “cold start sprays”, they could explode or cause the engine
to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution
• When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
• The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
• Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Observe the warnings in the
chapter Help with Ignition.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine by running it with the car stationary. You should
drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine reach oper-
ating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
– Stopping the engine.
– Turn the ignition key to position ⇒ page 162, fig. 126 .
A
2
A
3
WARNING (continued)
A
1
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 165 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving166
After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. The radiator fan can start auto-
matically if the hot engine causes the coolant temperature to rise, or if the sun
heats the engine compartment.
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine until the vehicle is stationary.
• The brake servo and the power assisted steering work only when the
engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle
when the engine is switched off. As you cannot steer and brake in the
normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.
• The steering lock can engage immediately when the key is removed
from the ignition lock. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
Caution
If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-
heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you
should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox
Selecting the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch right down.
–Put the gearlever ⇒ fig. 127 in the middle (neutral).
– Press the gearstick down and then to the left and forwards into
the reverse position shown on the gearstick.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running, before engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with
the clutch pressed in fully in order to protect the gearbox.
When reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is switched on the following
takes place:
Fig. 127 Manual gearbox
with shift diagram
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 166 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 167
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• The reversing lights come on.
• The heating or air conditioning automatically change to air recirculation
mode.
• The rear window heater switches on when the windscreen wiper is acti-
vated.
WARNING
• When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a
gear is engaged and the clutch released.
• Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
dent.
Caution
• Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure of your
hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
• When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
unnecessary wear and damage.
• Do not hold the car “on the clutch” on hills. This causes premature wear
and damages the clutch. It can also prevent power being transferred from the
engine to the gearbox.
Automatic gearbox
Gearbox programmes
The automatic gearbox has two gearbox programmes.
The gearbox management system is equipped with two driving programmes.
Depending on the driver or the driving situation, either a consumption
oriented programme or a more “sporty” programme will be selected.
The programme selection will be carried out automatically depending on how
the accelerator is used.
• The consumption-oriented programme will be selected if you use the
accelerator slowly or normally. This means that the gearbox will shift up
earlier and down later.
• A more “sporty” driving programme which shifts up gear later will be
selected if you use the accelerator more quickly.
Fig. 128 Centre console:
selector lever of the auto-
matic gearbox with
locking button
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 167 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving168
Note
A programme will, depending on the driving resistance, be selected automat-
ically that guarantees more pulling power, thus avoiding having to shift gear
constantly.
Selector lever lock
The selector lever lock in position P or N prevents gears from
being engaged inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle
to move.
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
– Switch on the ignition.
– Press and hold the brake pedal and press the selector lever lock
on the left of the selector lever at the same time ⇒ page 167,
fig. 128.
The selector lever lock only works if the vehicle is stationary or driving at
speeds up to 5 km/h (approx. 3 mph). At higher speeds the selector lever
lock is disengaged automatically in the N position.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for
instance, to “rock” the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow
or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not
depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about 1 second.
Driving a car with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes the forward gears up and down auto-
matically.
Switching on
– Start the engine with the selector lever in position P or N. Further
information ⇒ page 164.
Driving
– Press and hold the brake pedal.
– Press and hold the lock button (button on the knob of the
selector lever) ⇒ page 167, fig. 128, select gear position (R, D or
S).
– Release the lock button and wait for the gearbox to engage the
gear (a slight movement can be felt).
– Release the brake and press the accelerator ⇒ .
Stopping briefly
– Use the foot brake to prevent the car “creeping” forwards, e.g. at
traffic lights. The selector lever does not need to be put into the
positions P or N for this.
– Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
– Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
standstill ⇒ .
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 168 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 169
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Press and hold the lock button, move the selector lever to P and
release the lock button.
Driving up and down hills
– Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the
“Tiptronic” selector gate.
– Lightly press the selector lever back to change down.
Holding the car on a hill
– You should always hold the vehicle in position with the footbrake
to stop it from “rolling backwards” ⇒ . Do not try to prevent
the vehicle from “rolling backwards” by increasing the engine
speed while a range of gears is selected.
Moving away on an incline
– With a gear engaged, take your foot from the brake and depress
the accelerator.
The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you will need. This increases the
braking effect of the engine. For example, you should drive down a very steep
slope in 3rd gear. If the engine brake effect is not sufficient, the vehicle will
gain speed. The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox automatically
changes up to prevent the engine over revving. Use the foot brake to reduce
speed and change into 3rd gear using “Tiptronic” ⇒ .
Your vehicle has an automatic interlock which prevents the selector lever
being put into a position for driving forwards or in reverse from positions P or
N if the brake pedal is not depressed.
The ignition key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is in position P.
WARNING
• As a driver you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is running
and a gear is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is
running, you must apply the parking brake and engage parking lock P.
• If the engine is running and if D, S or R is engaged, you will need to hold
the car on the foot brake. The car will creep forward as the power transmis-
sion is not fully interrupted even when the engine is idling.
• Never press the accelerator when you move the selector lever. Risk of
accident.
• Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Risk of accident!
• Before you drive down a steep gradient, reduce your speed and use
“Tiptronic” to select a low gear.
• If you have to stop the vehicle on a gradient, always hold the vehicle in
position using the foot brake to stop it from rolling back.
• Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often
or for long periods. Constant braking will cause the brakes to overheat and
will considerably reduce the brake effect. This increases the braking
distance and could cause the brake system to fail.
• Never allow the car to roll down a gradient with the gear in neutral N, or
in selector lever position D, even if the engine is not running.
Caution
• If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling
by depressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. Otherwise, the
automatic gearbox /direct shift gearbox* may overheat causing damage. Pull
the handbrake on fully or depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away.
• If you allow the car to roll with the selector lever in position N with the
engine switched off, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox* will be
damaged as it will not be lubricated.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 169 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving170
Note
The two clutch system of the direct shift gearbox* has a system to protect
against excess strain, which may occur, for example, when the vehicle is held
on a hill with the clutch and the gearbox oil overheats. When the clutch is
overloaded, the vehicle begins to jerk and the position indicator of the
selector lever begins to flash. To avoid breakdowns, the clutch breaks the
power transmission between the engine and the gearbox, as a result of which
the vehicle loses impetus. If the clutch opens automatically due to over-
loading, depress the brake pedal and wait a few seconds before
continuing.
Selector lever positions
The selector lever positions and gears are shown on the
display in the combi-instrument.
Selector lever positions
The gear selected is displayed on the side of the selector lever and on the
display ⇒ fig. 129 in the combi-instrument.
P - parking lock
When the selector lever is in this position, the drive wheels are locked
mechanically.
The parking lock must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .
To move the selector lever from position P, the locking button in the selector
lever handle must be pressed and the brake pedal depressed at the same
time when the ignition is switched on.
Only the locking button has to be pressed to select the selector lever position
P.
If the battery has discharged, the selector lever cannot be removed from the
P position.
R - reverse gear
The reverse gear is engaged in this position.
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the
engine is idling ⇒ .
To move the selector lever to position R, press in the lock button and at the
same time press the brake pedal, with the ignition switched on.
With the selector lever in position R and the ignition switched on the
following occurs:
• The reversing lights come on
• The heating or air conditioning automatically change to air recirculation
mode.
• The rear window heater switches on when the windscreen wiper is acti-
vated.
Fig. 129 Instrument
panel: display showing
position of selector lever
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 170 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 171
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
N - neutral (idling)
If this position is selected, the gearbox is in neutral. Power is not transmitted
to the wheels and the engine does not have a braking function.
Never use the N position to drive down a hill. The engine does not function as
a brake and the brakes are subjected to excessive stain.
You could damage the automatic gearbox if you drive down hills with the
selector lever in position N and the engine switched off.
D - Drive (forwards)
In this position the gearbox automatically changes automatically to a longer
or shorter gear, according to the driving style and speed. The braking effect
of the engine when driving downhill is very limited when the selector is in this
position. The display also shows which gear has been selected in addition to
position D.
If position N has been selected and you wish to select D, you must press the
foot brake if the vehicle is stationary, or travelling at under 5 km/h (approx.
3mph) ⇒ .
WARNING
• Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Risk of accident!
• Never drive the vehicle with the engine and the ignition switched off.
You could loose control of the vehicle. The brake servo only functions when
the engine is running as does the elector-mechanical steering system. You
need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine and the
ignition are switched off. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal
manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury.
Caution
If you allow the car to roll with the selector lever in position N with the engine
switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubri-
cated.
Note
If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting D
again.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 171 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving172
Changing gear with “Tiptronic”
The “Tiptronic” system allows the driver to change gears
manually.
Changing gear with “Tiptronic” (selector lever)
– Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the
“Tiptronic” selector gate ⇒ fig. 130.
– Lightly press the selector to the front + to change up.
– Lightly press the selector lever back - to change down.
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox automatically shifts up to the next
gear shortly before the maximum permitted engine speed is reached.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox does not change down until
the point is reached where the engine could no longer over rev.
Gear selection display for Tiptronic
If the automatic gearbox is shifted manually or using “Tiptronic”, the indi-
vidual gears are shown on the display ⇒ fig. 131.
Kick-down function
The kick-down feature is designed to give maximum acceler-
ation.
If you press the accelerator right down, the gearbox automatically changes
down a gear, depending on speed and engine speed, to give the vehicle full
acceleration.
The gearbox does not shift up to the next gear until the engine reaches the
maximum determined engine speed for the gear.
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you accelerate quickly on slippery
surfaces. This may result in serious injury.
Fig. 130 Centre console:
gearbox selector lever
with locking button
Fig. 131 Instrument
panel: display showing
position of selector lever
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 172 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 173
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Be particularly careful, therefore, when using the kick-down function on
slippery road surfaces.
• You should use the kick-down function only when traffic and weather
conditions allow it to be used safely.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Using the handbrake
– Firmly pull the handbrake lever up all the way.
Releasing the handbrake
– Firmly pull the handbrake lever up all the way.
– Push in the lock button on the handbrake lever.
– Keep the locking knob pressed and push the lever all the way
down ⇒ .
The handbrake is located at the side of the driver seat. Always apply the
handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the handbrake applied
⇒ .
The handbrake warning lamp
lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning lamp goes out when the hand-
brake is released.
WARNING
• Never use the handbrake to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion.
The braking distance is considerably longer, as braking is only applied to
the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
• Never drive with the handbrake slightly applied. This could cause the
rear brakes to overheat and lose their braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads/linings.
Caution
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. On cars with a
manual gearbox engage 1st gear, or on an automatic move the selector lever
to P.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
– Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear. On an automatic move
the selector lever to P.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 173 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving174
– Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
– Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
⇒ .
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did
start to roll.
• If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point
towards the kerb.
• If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away
from the kerb.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle
unattended.
• Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
• Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is
locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and
could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
• Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could set the
vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear
lever / selector lever.
• Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold
inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Parking distance warning system*
Description
The parking distance warning system is a parking aid which
draws your attention to obstacles in front or behind the
vehicle.
The parking distance warning system assists the driver when parking. If the
rear of the vehicle is approaching an obstacle, an intermittent sound signal is
emitted. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals between tones. If
the vehicle is too close to the obstacle, the sound signal becomes constant.
The distance to an obstacle at the front is indicated via a high tone and via a
low tone at the rear. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals
between tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obstacle, the sound signal
becomes constant.
The obstacle may no longer be detected if the vehicle gets even closer to it!
The warning signal will stop when
• the vehicle moves away from the obstacle
• the outer sensors measure a constant distance for approximately 3
seconds.
The signal will not be switched off once the vehicle has reached the perma-
nent tone area.
Registering the obstacle
• Exterior front and rear sensors: from approx 80 cm
• Front central sensors: from approx 120 cm
• Rear central sensors: from approx 160 cm
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 174 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 175
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Switching the parking distance warning system on and off
Switching on the parking distance warning system
The parking distance warning system is activated by either pressing the
button ⇒ fig. 132 or by selecting the reverse gear. A warning lamp in the
button will indicate that the system is active.
Switching off the parking distance warning system
The parking distance warning system is switched off by pressing the button
(the warning lamp in the button goes out) or exceeding speeds of approx.
25 km/h.
WARNING
• The parking distance warning system cannot replace the driver's
assessment of the situation. The driver is personally responsible for safe
parking and other manoeuvres.
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not
registered.
• Be particularly aware of small children or animals when reversing. The
sensors may not always be able to detect them.
Caution
• The system may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw
bars, thin rails, fences, posts etc. This could result in damage to your car.
• The parking distance warning system works only at speeds of under
approx. 15 km/h.
• The parking distance warning sensors in the bumpers must be kept clean
and free of ice. When cleaning with pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the
sensors should be sprayed only briefly. A distance of 10 cm between the
sensors and the steam / hose nozzle must be observed.
Note
• A system fault will be indicated via a tone when activated for the first time
and by the warning lamp flashing in the button. Switch the system off at the
button and have it checked by a qualified dealership as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towing attachment
41)
, the parking
distance warning system is not active when the reverse gear is engaged if you
are towing a trailer.
• The parking distance warning system registers water as an obstacle.
Fig. 132 Detailed view of
dash panel Control button
for the parking distance
warning system
41)
Optional equipment
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 175 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving176
Cruise control system (CCS)
Cruise control operation
The cruise control system(CCS) is able to maintain the set
speed in the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the desired speed has been reached and the setting stored, you may
take your foot off the accelerator.
In vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox and in vehicles with an automatic
gearbox with the lever in positions P, N or R the cruise control does not
operate in first gear.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system (CCS) if it is not
possible to drive at constant speed.
• Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic or on steep roads, with
several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel),
as there is a risk of accident.
• Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead to take
the traffic situation into consideration. This is the duty of the driver. The
cruise control system is merely an aid to the driver.
• Never use the cruise control system when driving off-road or on
unpaved roads. This feature is designed for use on paved roads only. Risk
of accident.
• Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. This will
prevent you using it by mistake.
• It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing
road, traffic or weather conditions. This may cause an accident.
Caution
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: if the cruise control is activated the gearbox
should not be set in neutral without first releasing the clutch, as the the
engine speed will increase and this may cause damage.
Note
When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. The
vehicle will accelerate under its own weight. Reduce gears (with an automatic
gearbox, reduce gears using the “Tiptronic”) or brake using the footbrake.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 176 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving 177
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Lever for cruise control
The CCS can be operated using the controls on the turn signal
lever or on the multi-function steering wheel.
Switching on the system
– Move the control ⇒ fig. 133 to the left to ON. The
symbol
lights up in the combi-instrument when the cruise control system
is switched on.
Switching off system
– Move the control ⇒ fig. 133 to the right to OFF or press the
key ⇒ fig. 134 once.
Setting speed
– Press the lower part SET of the rocker switch ⇒ fig. 133 once
briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set
⇒ fig. 134 . This speed is then stored and maintained.
Increasing the stored speed
– To reach the desired speed hold down the upper part of the
rocker button ⇒ fig. 133 or button ⇒ fig. 134 .
Reducing the set speed
– To reach the desired speed hold down the lower part of the rocker
button
⇒
fig. 133 or button
⇒
fig. 134 . The
speed falls as the vehicle is no longer accelerating, not due to
sharp braking.
If you increase speed by using the accelerator, the previously programmed
speed will be resumed when the accelerator pedal is released. This will not be
the case, however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the
stored speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored
again.
Fig. 133 Turn signal and
main beam headlight
lever control and
rocker switch for
cruise control
A
A
A
B
Fig. 134 Multifunction
steering wheel: CCS
controls
A
B
A
A
A
B
-
+
A
B +
-
A
B -
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 177 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving178
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part
of the rocker switch or button .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road,
traffic or weather conditions. This may cause an accident.
Switching off system temporarily
Switching off the control temporarily in vehicles with a manual
gearbox
– Depress the brake or clutch pedal or
–Push the switch ⇒ page 177, fig. 133 to “OFF”, or
– Press the lower part of the button .
Switching off the control temporarily in vehicles with an automatic
gearbox
– Press the brake pedal or
– Select positions N or 1 or
–Push the switch ⇒ page 177, fig. 133 to “OFF”, or
– Press the lower part of the rocker button .
The speed stored will remain in the memory if the control is switched off
temporarily, unless you select positions N or 1. In this case, the speed stored
in the memory will be deleted.
To resume the control function, release the brake or clutch pedal, move the
switch to ON or press the button ⇒ page 177, fig. 133 or button
⇒ page 177, fig. 134 once.
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road,
traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
+
A
A
CANCEL
A
A
CANCEL
A
A +
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 178 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Intelligent technology 179
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Tips and Maintenance
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo supplements the pressure you exert on the brake pedal. It
works only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo does not operate, for example, when the vehicle is being
towed or due to a fault in the system, the brake pedal must be depressed
harder.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
• Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so
could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably
as the brake servo does not function.
• If the brake servo is out of action, for example if the car is being towed,
you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Brake pads wear display
If this light comes on, check the brake pads immediately.
At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on
the instrument panel.
WARNING
If the warning lamp lights up or the corresponding message appears on
the instrument panel, immediately have the brake pads checked and
replaced, if necessary, at a specialised workshop.
Brake warning lamp
If the warning lamp comes on, this may be caused by the
following reasons:
• With the handbrake on the warning light comes on on the instrument
panel. If you are travelling at over 6 km/h with the hand brake on, a text
message or the required operations may appear on the instrument panel. In
addition a warning signal is heard.
• In the event of insufficient brake fluid the warning lamp lights up on
the instrument panel. At the same time, a text message or the necessary oper-
ations may appear on the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle immediately
and check the level of the brake fluid ⇒ page 221
• In the event of a fault in the brake system the warning lamp lights up
on the instrument panel and three buzzes are emitted. At the same time, a
text message or the necessary operations may appear on the instrument
panel. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. You should obtain professional
assistance. This warning lamp
can light up together with the anti-locking
brake system warning lamp
⇒ .
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 179 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Intelligent technology180
WARNING
Special care must be taken when working on the engine or on components
in the engine compartment.
• It is important that you read and observe the corresponding warnings
before working in the engine compartment ⇒ page 209.
• If the brake warning symbol does not go out, or if it lights up when
driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or there is a fault in
the brake system. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.
You should obtain professional assistance.
• If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp
, the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could
cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the
rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified
workshop and have the fault corrected.
Brake assist system (BAS)
The brake servo (BAS) works only when the engine is running.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
In these cases the brake assist servo comes into action: on activating the
brake pedal quickly, the assistant interprets this as an emergency. It then very
quickly builds up the full brake pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing the braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
switches off automatically as soon as you release the brake.
WARNING
Try to always adapt the speed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the system tempt you
into taking any risks when driving. Risk of accident.
• The risk of accident is higher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep
your distance from the car in front, and when the road surface is slippery or
wet. The increased accident risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
system.
• The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of motion. Slippery and
wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system!
• Modifications to the vehicle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the
engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the
wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS
and lessen their efficiency.
Anti-locking brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the car's active safety
system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turning too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the pressure for this wheel. The driver
is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and
audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more of
the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has intervened. In
this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the
ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not “pump” the brake pedal.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 180 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Intelligent technology 181
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
On braking sharply on slippery ground, this system helps to keep the vehicle
under control, as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
Try to always adapt the speed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the system tempt you
into taking any risks when driving. Risk of accident.
• The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of motion. Slippery
and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS has
been activated, you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and
traffic conditions.
• The ABS cannot reduce the risk of accident if, for example, you are
driving with an unsuitable load or too close to the preceding vehicle.
WARNING
• Modifications to the vehicle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the
engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the
wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS
and lessen their efficiency.
• The effectiveness of ABS is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 225.
ABS warning lamp
The warning lamp monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
• The ABS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched
on.
• The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function is out of action). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
soon as possible.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP warning lamp will also light up.
42)
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp
lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system ⇒ .
At the same time, a text message or the necessary operations may appear on
the instrument panel.
WARNING
Special care must be taken when working on the engine or on components
in the engine compartment.
• It is important that you read and observe the corresponding warnings
before working in the engine compartment ⇒ page 209.
42)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 181 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Intelligent technology182
• If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp
, stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 221. If the fluid level has dropped below the
“MIN” mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. You should obtain
professional assistance.
• If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have
been caused by a failure of the ABS control function. This could cause the
rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the tail of the
vehicle to skid sideways. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop
and have the fault corrected.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
The electronic differential lock (EDL) only works when the engine is running.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed of the driven wheels.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other
driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The car remains operational
and will behave in the same way as a car without EDL. For this reason, the
driver is not informed that the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
Try to always adapt the speed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the system tempt you
into taking any risks when driving. Risk of accident.
• When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow,
press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may other-
wise start to spin. This could impair the car's stability.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic
situation.
WARNING
Modifications to the vehicle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the
engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the
wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS
and lessen their efficiency.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
The electronic stabilisation programme helps to reduce the
danger of skidding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL and TCS
and only works when the engine is running.
The ESP should generally be left switched on at all times. Only when the
necessary drive can not be obtained should the ESP be disconnected.
For example:
• when driving with snow chains,
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 182 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Intelligent technology 183
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
• when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer
need wheel spin.
When the ESP is deactivated, the TCS is switched off at the same time. This
means that this technology is not available for as long as the ESP remains
switched off.
How ESP works
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually. The
system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the car. If the desired course is not being main-
tained accurately (for instance if the car is beginning to skid) the ESP compen-
sates automatically by applying the brake at the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the car back to a stable condi-
tion. If the car is tending to oversteer (break away at the rear) the brake appli-
cation is concentrated on the outside front wheel; if the car is understeering
(tending to follow a wider radius in a bend), the brake is mainly applied to the
inside rear wheel.
How the Traction Control System (TCS) works
TCS reduces engine power to help prevent the driven wheels of front-wheel
drive vehicles losing traction during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
the ABS, the TCS will also be out of action. TCS helps the car to start moving,
accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may other-
wise be difficult or even impossible.
When does the warning lamp light up or flash
?
• The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and
should go out again after a few seconds.
• The warning lamp will start flashing to indicate that the ESP and TCS
are counteracting an unstable driving condition.
• It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
• It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
• It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the warning lamp
lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this
may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the function.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully func-
tional
If the battery is disconnected, the warning lamp
lights after turning the
ignition on. This should turn off after a brief trip.
WARNING
Try to always adapt the speed of the vehicle to weather, road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the system tempt you
into taking any risks when driving. Risk of accident.
• The ESP and TCS cannot defy the laws of motion. This should be kept in
mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
• Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation.
• The ESP cannot reduce the risk of accident if, for example, you are
driving with an unsuitable load or too close to the preceding vehicle.
WARNING
• Modifications to the vehicle or work carried out incorrectly (e.g. to the
engine, the brake system, running gear or any components affecting the
wheels and tyres) could affect the efficiency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS
and lessen their efficiency.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 183 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Intelligent technology184
• The effectiveness of the ESP is also determined by the tyres fitted
⇒ page 225.
Caution
In order to ensure that ESP and TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Power steering
Power steering does not work if the engine is not running or if the power
steering system has developed a fault. In this case the steering wheel is very
hard to turn.
Caution
Do not keep the steering wheel in the full-lock position for longer than
15 seconds when the engine is running. This could cause damage to the
power steering system.
Four-wheel drive*
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the engine power is distrib-
uted to all four wheels
The four-wheel drive system is fully automatic and does not require interven-
tion by the driver. The engine power is permanently distributed to all four
wheels. The engine power is distributed automatically to both axles
according to the road conditions and how you drive.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its four-wheel drive, your car will have plenty of traction in winter
conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend
that, in keeping with cars with front or rear wheel drive, winter tyres or all-
season tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when winter road conditions
are expected, mainly because this will give a better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, they must be fitted to the front
wheels of cars with four-wheel drive.
Replacing tyres
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres should have the same amount
of wear. All four wheels must have the same rolling circumference.
WARNING
Never drive too fast on icy, slippery or wet surfaces. You could lose control
of your vehicle if you drive too fast. This may result in serious injury.
• Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and
traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by four-wheel drive
tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
• The four-wheel drive gives the vehicle good acceleration even in winter.
When braking, a four-wheel drive vehicle handles in the same way as a
front drive vehicle.
• On wet roads the front wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen,
there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as with
a front-wheel drive car.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 184 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment 185
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
– Do not use full throttle.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
– Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil
consumption reduced.
Running in tyres and brake pads
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the first 500 km. New
brake pads should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km.
During the first 200 km, you can compensate for the reduced braking effect
by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer-
gency stop, the braking distance will be longer with new brake pads than with
brake pads which have been run-in.
WARNING
• New tyres do not give maximum grip to start with, and need running in.
This may cause an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500 km.
• New brake pads must be “run in” and do not have the correct friction
properties during the first 200 km. However, you can compensate for the
slightly reduced braking effect by applying more pressure on the brake
pedal.
Braking effect and braking distance
The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under
which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we
recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by SEAT
Service more frequently than recommended in the service schedule.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 185 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment186
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-
ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in this case, “dry”
the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
• New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 200 km. The slightly reduced braking effect can be compen-
sated for by increasing pressure on the brake pedal. This also applies when
new brake pads are fitted.
• If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.
• When driving downhill, the brakes work hard and get hot very quickly.
Before driving down a long steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if
your vehicle has automatic transmission). In this way you will make use of
the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes.
• Never let the brakes “rub” by only applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking
distance. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
• Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not work.
• Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
• Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the
brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the notes ⇒ page 202 before
buying accessories.
• If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider-
ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
journeys.
Exhaust gas emission control system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Always use unleaded petrol.
– Do not run the fuel tank dry.
– For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil
⇒ page 215, “Topping up engine oil ”.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 249.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest qualified workshop. These symptoms are communicated by the
exhaust gas warning lamp ⇒ page 70. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter
the exhaust system and escape into the environment. The catalytic converter
can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
• Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
• Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust
system, because the heat from the engine could ignite them.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 186 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment 187
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Caution
Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply
may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on
the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme-
died by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If driving
conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short
trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the diesel engine
particulate filter warning lamp will light up.
WARNING
• The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera-
tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under-
neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution
• The vehicle has not been designed to refuel with mixtures of FAME fuel
(biodiesel) over 7%. The diesel particulate filter is damaged when the mixture
percentage is exceeded.
Economical and environmentally friendly
driving
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-
ical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce
pollution while saving money are listed below.
As you drive try to anticipate the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. By anticipating the situation, you
are required to brake less often and, therefore accelerate less. If it is possible,
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero
(disconnection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up through the gears quickly.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 187 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment188
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2,000 rpms.
Automatic gearbox: Accelerate in moderation and avoid the “kick-down” (full
throttle) position.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a very long time to warm up when it is running at idling
speed. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high
during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum
reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera-
ture.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having
driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding
short trips wherever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at the correct pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by
as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-
tion by up to 10 %.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%
more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier
even when it is not in use.
Save electrical energy
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need
for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always
turn off electrical equipment when you do not need them. Examples of equip-
ment that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window
heating or the seat heaters*.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 188 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment 189
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new Seat.
Design measures for economical recycling
• Joints and connections designed for ease of dismantling
• Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
• Increased use of single-grade materials
• Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
• Nearly all materials used can be recycled
• Similar types of plastics grouped together for easy recycling
• Recycled materials used in manufacture
• Reduction of volatile compounds in plastics
• CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioning
Compliance with prohibited materials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,
mercury, chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
• Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
• Solvent-free cavity sealing
• Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
• Solvent-free adhesives
• No CFCs used in production
• Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
• Overall water consumption reduced
• Heat recovery systems
• Water-soluble paint
Driving abroad
Notes
For driving abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
• For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
• In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centre may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available from your Authorised Service
Centre.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 189 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment190
Trailer towing
What do you need to bear in mind when towing a trailer?
The vehicle can, if suitably equipped, be used to tow a trailer or caravan.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket ⇒ page 204.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug, you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available from SEAT Service.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the maximum permitted trailer weights. If you do not load the
trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb corre-
spondingly steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). Where possible, operate the trailer
with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing
bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.
The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights given on the data plate
of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures
for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing
bracket, are given in the registration documents and “Technical data”.
Gross combination weight
The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus
the actual weight of the laden trailer. If the maximum permissible trailer
weight is to be utilized, the weight of the vehicle may have to be reduced.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permitted pressure shown on the sticker on
the inside of the tank flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in accord-
ance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors
fitted. Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on hinged extension
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient vision to the rear.
Headlight adjustment
If towing a trailer the dipped light may dazzle other drivers. Use the headlight
range control to lower the cone of light. If you do not have headlight range
control, have the headlights adjusted by a qualified dealership.
WARNING
• Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
• To avoid dazzling other drivers, adjust the dipped beam according to
the load. If not, an accident may occur.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 190 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment 191
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Note
• Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
mend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the
vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.
• Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket
The removable ball coupling of the towing bracket is stored
with the tools on board behind the right-hand side trim of the
luggage compartment.
It is necessary to first tense the towing bracket removing the ball
coupling.
Remove the towing bracket from the luggage compartment
– Open the lock by turning the key ⇒ fig. 135 clockwise.
– Take out the wheel completely in the direction of the arrow
and turn clockwise to the maximum.
– Release the wheel. The towing bracket is pretensed.
– Remove the towing bracket.
Storing towing bracket in the luggage compartment
– First tension the towing bracket.
– Place the towing bracket in its casing on the right-hand side of
the luggage compartment. The bracket engages and the tension
is released ⇒ .
– Check that it is correctly fitted.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
If the ball coupling is fitted it s possible to store the cover of the tow-bar in a
plastic bag next to the tools.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely to prevent it
being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
• When the pretensed towing bracket is being fitted, there is a risk of
injury in the event that the wheel goes back on itself.
Fig. 135 Location of
towing bracket
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 191 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Driving and the environment192
Note
By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed and
it obscures the number plate.
• When placing the towing bracket in the casing check that it is no longer
tensed and securely fastened.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the car and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For this
reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible top speed in
unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when
driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed.
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear (in both manual and
automatic gearboxes) in good time before going down a steep hill. This
enables you to use the engine braking effect to slow down the vehicle.
Overheating
At very high temperatures and during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
and high engine speed, always monitor the temperature indicator for the
coolant.
Electronic Stabilisation Program
Do not switch off the ESP when towing a trailer. The ESP makes it easier to
stabilise if the trailer starts to snake.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 192 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 193
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Regular care
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt
and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Car care products
Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used up the product.
WARNING
• Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept
closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to
comply could result in poisoning.
• Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package
before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours;
these should be used in well ventilated areas.
• Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo-
sion risk.
• Before you wash your vehicle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off
the engine, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
Caution
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
paintwork or glass on your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of
water.
For the sake of the environment
• When purchasing car care products, try to select ones which are not
harmful to the environment.
• Left over car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary house-
hold waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 193 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle194
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems
in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large
extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the
wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.
After the car has been washed, the brakes could respond later than normal as
the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry” the
brakes by braking several times.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of
accident.
Washing by hand
Washing the vehicle
– First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off.
– Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on
the roof and work your way down. Use only light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last using a different sponge or
glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry the surface of the vehicle gently using a chamois leather.
– If it is cold, dry the rubber seals and the surfaces they touch with
a cloth to prevent them freezing. Apply silicone spray to the
rubber seals.
After cleaning the vehicle
– If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. “Dry” the brakes by braking several times.
WARNING
• The ignition must always be switched off before the vehicle is washed.
• Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident.
Caution
• Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is
dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch
the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.
• Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: if the vehicle is rinsed with a
hose, do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, luggage compartment, or bonnet. Otherwise there is a risk of malfunc-
tion.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 194 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 195
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
For the sake of the environment
In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only
in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water
entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere
else may be prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 196.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called “dirt blasters”
⇒ .
– If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. “Dry” the brakes by braking several times.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (“rotating
nozzle”). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible
and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident.
Caution
• Do not use water hotter than 60°C. This could damage the car.
• To avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi-
tive materials for example: flexible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is
especially important for bumpers painted in the same colour as the vehicle.
The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Waxing the car
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run
off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
A good coat of wax helps to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants ⇒ page 193. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to
protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 195 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle196
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author-
ised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 195, “Waxing the car”.
Caution
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
• Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
• Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents will damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with special solvent-
free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution
• The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
• Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning the windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based
glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
– Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers
which have been used on painted surfaces are not suitable for use on
windows. They will be soiled with wax deposits which would smear the
windows.
If possible use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only. Do not move it to and fro.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits.
Wax deposits have to be removed with a special cleaner which is available
from your Authorised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could
cause the wiper blades to judder. A window cleanser specifically for removing
wax will stop the blades juddering if added to the windscreen washer fluid.
Grease removing cleansers will not remove wax deposits.
Caution
• Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 196 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 197
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on
the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The weather strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
• Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
• Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Cleaning alloy wheels
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheels.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 197 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle198
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. It is
important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at
regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective
coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be
repaired immediately.
WARNING
• Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances
and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the
tyres. This may cause an accident.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle. “Dry” the brakes by braking several times.
Underbody sealant
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corro-
sion and damage.
The protective coating could be damaged when driving. We recommend that
the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be
checked, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried
out by your Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire
hazard.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after the salting period.
Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and
preserving products and has the necessary equipment. For this reason, we
recommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
If this job is carried out, you should ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment
afterwards.
WARNING
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 209.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 198 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 199
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake firmly and always
remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet.
• Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
• Do not clean the underside of vehicle, wheel arches without protecting
your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts.
Failure to comply could result in injury.
• Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing
the vehicle.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
engine washing should be carried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit-
able filling station.
Care of the vehicle interior
Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleansers
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
– Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning cloth seat covers and fabric trim
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 199 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle200
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
– More stubborn dirt can be removed using a mild soap solution
(pure liquid soap; two tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
– Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the
seams.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather care
– The leather should be treated regularly (about twice a year) with
a special leather-care product, which is available from your
Authorised Service Centre.
– Apply these products very sparingly.
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather, as
a natural product. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected
hides employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and
dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking
after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be
protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. However, slight
colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal.
Caution
• Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
• To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Cleaning seat belts
A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly.
Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly.
Cleaning seat belts
– Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out.
– Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow the seat belt fabric to dry.
– Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts the belt will not retract correctly into the auto-
matic belt retractor.
WARNING
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can
impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 200 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 201
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
• Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the
belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
• Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise the belt retractors could become damaged.
Cleaning the cool/thermos box
– Before using the insulated box for the first time, you should clean
it, using a household detergent.
– Always clean the inside of the insulated box when it is soiled.
If you do not plan to use the insulated box for a long period, disconnect the
power supply and clean the inside and outside of the box. Place a folded
towel between the box and its lid. This prevents mould and damp stains
forming in the cooling and heating box.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 201 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications202
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT
Approved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly
and professionally.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the
reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason
SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if
these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered
by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), these must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or drink holders, should never
be fitted on the covers of, or within the working range of, the airbags. If
they are, there is a danger of resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an
accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other systems may be affected by the faults.
This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and
also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Authorised Service Centres cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly.
For this reason, we recommend that all work should be performed by an
Authorised Service Centre using genuine and SEAT
®
approved parts and
accessories.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 202 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 203
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead
to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a collapsible roof aerial* with antitheft
system*, which can be folded backwards, when, for example, going through
an automatic carwash.
To fold
Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and then
screw in again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
You will require an external aerial for mobile phones and two-
way radios.
SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with mobile telephones and two-way
radios providing the following conditions are observed:
• The correct installation of an external aerial,
• transmitting power of maximum 10 watts.
An external aerial is needed to give the equipment its optimal range.
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be fitted only by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
• Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
• Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag
is triggered.
• If you use mobile telephones or two-way radios in the vehicle without
an external aerial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed
authorised limits. This also applies to external aerials that have not been
correctly installed.
Caution
Failure to observe the above conditions could cause the electronics to
malfunction. The most common causes of faults are:
• no external aerial,
• external aerial incorrectly installed,
• transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
radio.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 203 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications204
Retrofitting a towing bracket
The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing bracket.
Fig. 136 Attachment
points for towing bracket
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 204 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 205
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the car, it must be done according to
the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket ⇒ page 204, fig. 136 are
underneath the vehicle.
Always observe the minimum distance from the middle of the ball coupling to
the ground (350 to 420 mm). This also applies when the vehicle is fully laden,
including maximum drawbar load.
Fitting a towing bracket
• Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
• Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate pilot lamp).
• Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts have to be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a socket connected to the vehicle's electrical system. This
requires specialist knowledge and tools.
• The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points
which must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, it should be done by a qualified dealer.
• If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted, this could cause a safety risk.
• For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
Caution
If the connector socket is not fitted correctly, this could cause damage to the
vehicle's electrical system.
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 205 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels206
Checking and refilling levels
Refilling
The tank filler neck is located at the rear right-hand side of the vehicle.
The tank flap is locked and unlocked automatically by the central locking
system.
The fuel tank holds about 70 litres.
The tank cap can, once unscrewed, be hung on the tank flap ⇒ fig. 137.
After filling up, screw the tank cap back in firmly and close the tank flap until
it engages.
WARNING
All legal stipulations must be observed when transporting a reserve
supply. For safety reasons, we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel
canister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and
leak.
Caution
• Never run the fuel tank empty on vehicles equipped with a catalytic
converter. An irregular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In this way the fuel
can arrive without burning the exhaust system, which could cause the cata-
lyser to overheat resulting in damage.
• Spilt fuel should be removed from the vehicle paint finish as quickly as
possible as the paint could otherwise be damaged. Especially if biodiesel
fuel is being used ⇒ page 207.
For the sake of the environment
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are
warm.
Fig. 137 Tank filler neck
and tank flap
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 206 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 207
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Norm”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Regulation Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol”). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one recom-
mended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power. If, in exceptional circumstances, the correct
octane rating is not available:
• For engines which require Premium unleaded petrol (95 RON) the
following is valid: Regular unleaded fuel with 91 RON can also be used. This
can, however, result in a slight loss of power under certain driving conditions.
• For engines which require Premium unleaded petrol (98 RON) the
following is valid: Premium unleaded fuel with 95 RON can also be used. This
can, however, result in a slight loss of power under certain driving conditions.
– If premium unleaded petrol is not available, the engine can be run on
regular unleaded petrol with 91 RON as an “emergency measure”. In this
case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Avoid using full
throttle. Fill up with premium petrol as soon as possible.
Caution
• Petrol that follows EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.
However, the so-called “bioethanol fuels” available at commercial establish-
ments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.
• Even one tankfull of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
• High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel ⇒ page 206.
RME fuel*
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
• Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
• DIN is a German abbreviation for “Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.”,
the German standards institute.
• EN means European Norm.
• FAME is the English abbreviation “Fatty Acid Methyl Ester”
Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
has been prepared for biodiesel use.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 207 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels208
Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel)
• The performance of a vehicle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
• Fuel consumption of a vehicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
• RME fuel can be used in winter at temperatures down to approx. -10°C.
• At outside temperatures below -10°C, we recommend using winter diesel
fuel.
• Your vehicle is designed to be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%
blended biodiesel.
Caution
• RME fuel can damage the fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
adjusted.
• If you decide to use biodiesel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
which is DIN E 14,214 compliant.
• If you use biodiesel that does not meet the required standard, the fuel
filter could become clogged.
Note
• In case of low exterior temperatures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
higher than 50%, an increase in gas emission may occur during operation of
the independent heating.
• The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
this reason, we recommend that, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel
change, also change the fuel filter. Also note the instructions in the Inspec-
tion and Maintenance plan.
• If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we
recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
order to avoid damage to the injection system.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For
this reason, “winter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22°C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24°C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15°C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24°C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution
Do not mix fuel additives (“thinners”, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Supplementary heating system
The supplementary heating system raises the calorific capacity of the heating
while the engine is running and outside temperatures are very low. The
supplementary heating system connects and disconnects automatically.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 208 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 209
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
The exhaust fumes produced are eliminated through an exhaust pipe below
the vehicle.
Note
• For short journeys, very low outside temperatures and a percentage of
biodiesel fuel of over 50 % too much smoke may be produced.
• Every time the engine is switched off, the fan continues to operate for a
short time in order to more quickly cool the heater. When refuelling it is not
necessary to wait until the fan stops operating.
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 98.
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know
exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work
carried out by a qualified workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For
this reason we recommend that you have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions ⇒ page 202. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
hazardous area ⇒ .
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and
refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk
of accident or fire.
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining
burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the
engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
• Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
• Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector
lever to position P.
• Keep children away from the vehicle.
• Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
• Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This
is a fire hazard.
• Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the
points where the jump leads are attached ⇒ page 250. The battery could
explode.
• Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could
start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the
key removed from the ignition!
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 209 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels210
• Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot.
If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
• Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick
cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
• Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths
and tools, in the engine compartment.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
• If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the
engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the
rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the
following points:
− Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
− Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get
trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
clothes.
− Always think carefully about pressing the accelerator if a gear is
engaged in either an automatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could
move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
• If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo-
nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above
warnings:
− Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when
this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
− Do not smoke.
− Never work near naked flames.
− Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution
When changing or topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 210 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before you open the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper
arms are in contact with the windscreen. Failure to do so could
damage the paintwork.
Opening the bonnet
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dashboard
⇒ fig. 138 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet is
unlocked by a spring ⇒ .
– Gently lift the bonnet and press the unlock button ⇒ fig. 139 in
the direction of the arrow.
– Open the bonnet to the point where it is held open by the gas
struts.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
• Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping
from the engine compartment.
• Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet,
then carefully open the bonnet.
• Make sure that the support rod is inserted securely and properly in the
holder in the open bonnet.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 209.
Fig. 138 Detail of foot-
well area on driver's side:
lever for unlocking the
bonnet.
Fig. 139 Detail of radi-
ator grille: lever for
unlocking the bonnet.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 211 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels212
Closing the bonnet
Closing the bonnet
1. To close the bonnet, pull it down to overcome the gas strut pres-
sure.
2. Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its clasp. Do not press
down ⇒ .
If the bonnet does not close properly, open it again and close it properly.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and
completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
• After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The
bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
• If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is
moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk
of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.
Specifications
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long
service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change
the oil, always use an oil that complies to the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil
conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at
atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil
may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example,
long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all
conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together
the different standards for petrol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
both types of engines.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 212 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
period, an oil change is not required.
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity
43)
.
These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Fig. 140 Types of oil
according to temperature
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump
a)
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kW
a)
VW 506 01/ VW 507 00
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)
a)
VW 507 00
43)
Viscosity: oil density
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 213 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels214
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 209.
– Park the vehicle on an even surface.
– Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back
into the sump.
–Raise the bonnet ⇒ page 211.
– Pull out the dipstick.
– Wipe the dipstick with a cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as
far as it will go.
– Then pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
– Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as it will go.
If the oil level is in area ⇒ fig. 141 , you must not top up with oil.
If the oil level is in area , you may top up with oil (approx. 0,5 l).
If the oil level is in area , you must top up with oil (approx. 1,0 l).
It is normal for the engine to consume a certain amount of oil. Consumption
can be up to 1.0 litres per 1,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must
be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
When the engine is working hard, for instance during sustained high-speed
motorway cruising in summer, when towing a trailer or climbing on mountain
passes, the oil level should preferably be kept within area (but not above).
WARNING
Special care must be taken when working on the engine or on components
in the engine compartment.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 209.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact SEAT Service
Centre
®
.
Fig. 141 Dipstick
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 214 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 209.
– Unscrew cap from oil filler opening ⇒ fig. 142.
– Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
– To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
– As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram ⇒ page 262.
Engine oil specification ⇒ page 212.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot
engine components when topping up.
Caution
If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
The two different oil change intervals are shown in the Inspection and Main-
tenance Plan.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
Fig. 142 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
A
B
A
A
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 215 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels216
• Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings
⇒ page 209, “Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment”.
• Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
• Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
• When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori-
zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
• Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
• Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
the reach of children until it is disposed of.
Caution
No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and
specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
• Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40°C.
WARNING
• The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the
coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the
reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
• The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to
provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that
can be expected. At extremely cold ambient temperatures, the coolant
could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also
not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 216 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Caution
• Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
causing serious damage to the engine.
• The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 209.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
– Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
– To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap ⇒ .
Checking coolant level
– Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
– If the level is underneath the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
–Only use new coolant.
– Do not fill above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
– Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment diagram ⇒ page 262.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications ⇒ page 216.
Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+, is not avail-
able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up
to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
⇒ page 216.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
Fig. 143 In the engine
compartment: Coolant
expansion tank cap
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 217 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels218
The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 209.
• When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do
not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is
a burn injury risk.
Caution
• When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
• If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with
fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
Fig. 144 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 218 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be
carried out cautiously.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 209.
Caution
• Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
• Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing the front windscreen wiper blades
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly. Change them as
required.
Change the windscreen wiper blades
– Lift the wiper arm away from the glass. Do not pull the arm by the
blade.
– Turn the wiper blade as shown by arrow ⇒ fig. 145 as far as
it will go and then pull it off as shown by arrow ⇒ fig. 146 .
– Push a new wiper blade of the same length and version onto the
wiper arm and turn the wiper blade to the stop against the direc-
tion shown by arrow .
– Place the wiper arm in the starting position.
These are available from SEAT Service
®
.
If the wipers scrape they must be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if
they are dirty.
Fig. 145 Windscreen
wipers raised
Fig. 146 Removing front
wipers
A
1
A
2
A
1
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 219 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels220
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
• Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually - this
could cause damage!
Note
• On fitting the wiper blades, do not exchange the driver and passenger
side blades.
Changing the rear wiper blade
A damaged wiper blade should be replaced immediately.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as
required.
Changing the rear wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the rear window.
– Release the wiper blade as shown by arrow ⇒ fig. 147 and, at
the same time, pull the wiper blade as shown by arrow .
– Unhook the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
– Now take off the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the opposite
direction to arrow .
Fig. 147 Changing a rear
wiper blade
A
1
A
2
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 220 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Insert a new wiper blade of the same length and design in the
direction of arrow and hook the blade back onto the wiper
arm.
– Now pull the wiper blade against the direction of arrow until
it engages.
– Push the wiper arm back against the glass.
These are available from SEAT Service
®
.
If the wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
• Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all windows regularly.
• The wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.
Caution
• Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
• Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
• Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually - this
could cause damage!
Note
• The wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the
bonnet is properly closed.
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
– Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram ⇒ page 262. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
A
2
A
2
Fig. 148 In the engine
compartment: Brake fluid
reservoir cover
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 221 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels222
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
“MIN” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
ment panel will warn you if the brake fluid level is too low ⇒ page 70.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe
the warnings ⇒ page 209.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Program indicates the brake fluid change
intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and follow the warnings ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on page 209 in
“Working in the engine compartment”.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
the ambient air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
system could corrode. This also considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brake fluid. Heavy use of the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with the US standard
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
• Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and
observe the warnings ⇒ page 209.
• Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe
place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
• Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance
Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid
is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency
of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution
Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 222 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Battery
Warnings on handling the battery
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the
risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
• Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
particles containing lead.
• Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and
eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralize any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
• Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited. When handling
cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause
injury.
• A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
• Keep children away from acid and batteries.
• Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the
engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
• Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
• When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
• Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never
reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
• Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0
°
C.
• Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
• Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a
damaged battery immediately.
Caution
• Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
• Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-
tive gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the
battery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 223 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels224
• If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from frost. If it “freezes” it will be damaged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-
mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
– Open the bonnet and open the battery cover at the front ⇒ in
“Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment” on
page 209 ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on
page 223.
– Check the colour display in the "magic eye" on the top of the
battery.
– If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until
they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram ⇒ page 262.
The round window (“magic eye”) on the top of the battery changes colour,
depending on the charge level and electrolyte level of the battery.
If the colour in the window is colourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level
of the battery is too low. Have the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
The colours green and black are used by the workshops for diagnostic
purposes.
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
• We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof
batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This
standard applies as of 2001.
• Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe
the warnings ⇒ in “Warnings on handling the battery” on page 223.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 224 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
household waste.
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in ⇒ page 185.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
• New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu-
larly carefully to avoid risk of accident.
• Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
• If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when
driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 225 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels226
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
bar to the values given on the sticker.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
• If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Fig. 149 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 150 Changing
wheels
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 226 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
⇒ page 226, fig. 149, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on
the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries ⇒ .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
⇒ page 226.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown ⇒ page 226, fig. 150. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
• The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to
the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
risk of “aquaplaning”.
• At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
• If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked
by an Authorised Service Centre.
• Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
• Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling ⇒ .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 227 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels228
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
• A direction of rotation symbol
• “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT... 1105...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2005.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-
ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
• We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
• Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
• Never use old tyres or those with an unknown “history of use”.
• If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the
brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
• All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note
• For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
• If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
WARNING (continued)
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 228 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
even if it is the same model ⇒ page 202.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
• The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
to them.
• Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
• If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen
whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is
too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Caution
The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles
handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
specified for summer tyres (see sticker on tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 227, “New tyres and wheels” determines the
following speed limits: ⇒
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 227, “New tyres and wheels”.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise,
this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 229 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Checking and refilling levels230
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
sizes ⇒ page 260.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 15
mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
Note
In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The legal
requirements of the country should be followed.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 230 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 231
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
If and when
Vehicle tools*, spare wheel*, breakdown set*
and towing bracket
Location
The vehicle tools, the spare wheel and the removable ball
coupling of the towing bracket are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Vehicle tool kit and removable ball coupling
The vehicle tool kit and removable towing bracket ball coupling are stored on
the right of the luggage compartment, behind a cover.
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is stored underneath the vehicle ⇒ page 232.
Caution
Make sure that the spare wheel / removed wheel and the tools are stored
safely in the luggage compartment.
Vehicle tools*
The vehicle tools are stored in the luggage compartment, behind the side
cover on the right and are secured using a thumb screw ⇒ fig. 151 . The
tool kit comprises the following items:
Tool box
44)
Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for slackened wheel
bolts. The screwdriver blade is reversible. The screwdriver is in the wheel
bolt.
Towing eye, removable
Open jaw spanner 10 x 13 mm
Wire hook
44)
for pulling off the centre cover and the wheel bolt caps
44)
Optional equipment
Fig. 151 Storage of
vehicle tools
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 231 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when232
Box spanner for wheel bolts
Jack. Before you return the jack to the tool box, you must fully wind in the
claw. The crank must then be folded tight against the side of the jack.
The removable towing bracket
44)
, the key for unlocking the sunroof in an
emergency
44)
and the anti-theft wheel bolt adaptor
44)
are stored next to the
vehicle tools.
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
We recommend you carry the wheel bolt adapter
44)
in the vehicle tool kit at
all times.
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the
adapter. You will need this number to replace the adapter if lost. Make a note
the code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place - but
not in your vehicle.
WARNING
• Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten
the wheel bolts. It is not suitable for tightening the bolts to the necessary
torque. This may cause an accident.
• The jack supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels
on this model. Never attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other
loads. Risk of injury.
• Use the jack only on firm, level ground.
• Never start the engine when you have raised the vehicle on the jack.
Risk of accident.
• Never place your body (e.g. arm or leg) underneath the vehicle if it is
only supported by the jack Risk of injury.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle - Risk of accident!.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Lift the cover ⇒ fig. 152 located on the floor of the luggage
compartment, next to the tailgate lock.
2. Pull the ring of the rubber seal upwards.
3. Remove the box spanner from the vehicle tools.
4. Fit the box spanner on the bolt, to the maximum, and hold in this
position. At the same time press the safety ring downwards
⇒ .
5. Turn the box spanner several times to the left, until the spare
wheel can be fitted, hanging from a wire, vertically behind the
vehicle.
6. Separate the plastic pieces so that they may be inserted into the
central aperture of the rim and so free the wheel.
A
6
A
7
Fig. 152 Taking out the
spare wheel
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
C
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 232 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 233
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• If you are driving without the spare wheel, the cable should be rolled up
and the bracket fastened to the floor of the luggage compartment.
Fitting the defective wheel in the spare wheel casing
1. Place the wheel behind the vehicle.
2. Insert the support on the inside of the defective wheel, through
a central opening.
3. Insert the defective wheel below the vehicle, with the outer side
facing downwards.
4. Remove the box spanner ⇒ page 232, fig. 152 and turn the
bolt on the floor of the luggage compartment several times to the
right, until the defective wheel is firmly secured against the
inside of the luggage compartment floor ⇒ in “Taking out
the spare wheel” on page 232.
5. Close the opening with the rubber seal ⇒ page 232, fig. 152
and lower the cover .
WARNING
Tighten the bolt of the luggage compartment to a maximum torque of 25
Nm.
Fig. 153 Resting point for
the spare wheel on the
bumper
A
C
A
B
A
A
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 233 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when234
Components
Components
The anti-puncture kit contains the following components:
Tyre valve remover
Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Compressor
Tube for inflating tyres
Pressure gauge
Air bleed screw
ON/OFF switch
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant ⇒
Spare tyre valve
Caution
• Note the expiry date on the bottle of tyre sealant Do not use sealant paste
that has expired. A bottle of tyre sealant can be obtained at any SEAT dealer.
• Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements.
• Likewise, note any instructions from the anti-puncture kit's manufacturer
(if included).
Note
• In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, it is first necessary to remove the
tools in order to reach the anti-puncture kit.
Preparation of anti-puncture kit
Small punctures (up to 4 mm in diameter), particularly ones
in the tread, can be sealed using the anti-puncture set.
If you have a puncture, stop the car well away from moving traffic.
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set the emergency triangle
in position. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
– Take the compressor and the bottle of sealant from the luggage
compartment.
– Remove the anti/puncture sticker ⇒ fig. 154 and apply it to
the instrument panel where it can be seen clearly.
– Leave the foreign body (e. g. screw, nail) in the tyre.
– Take the cap off the tyre valve.
Fig. 154 Contents of anti-
puncture kit
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
A
9
A
10
A
11
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 234 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Breakdown set*
If and when 235
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
– Use the enclosed extractor ⇒ page 234, fig. 154 to unscrew
the valve insert. Place the valve insert on a clean surface.
– Vigorously shake the sealant bottle ⇒ page 234, fig. 154 for
several seconds.
Sealing and inflating tyres
Inflating the tyre
– Thread the inflating tube ⇒ fig. 155 on the valve.
– Check that the air bleed screw is screwed tight.
– Start the engine and leave it running in neutral.
– Attach the connector to a 12 volt socket of the vehicle.
– Connect the compressor using the ON/OFF switch for at least
six minutes.
– Run the compressor until a tyre pressure of between 2,0 and 2,5
bar has been reached. This should take a maximum of 6 minutes.
– Detach the compressor when the pressure reaches 2,0 and 2,5
bars.
– If the desired pressure is not reached, unscrew the valve inflator
tube and store the compressor back in the vehicle.
– Move the vehicle some 10 metres forwards or backwards so that
the sealant is evenly distributed in the tyre interior.
– Take the compressor out again, screw the inflator tube well into
the valve and inflate the tyre again.
– If the required pressure can still not be reached, the tyre is too
badly damaged. The tyre cannot be sealed with the anti-puncture
kit. Do not attempt to travel in the vehicle and contact the nearest
qualified dealership.
– Disconnect the compressor and unscrew the compressor tyre
filler hose from the tyre valve.
– Drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) once
a tyre pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar has been reached.
– Check the tyre pressure after you have been driving for
10 minutes.
A
1
A
10
Fig. 155 Contents of anti-
puncture kit
A
5
A
7
A
9
A
8
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 235 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when236
WARNING
• Do not allow the sealant to get onto your skin or into your eyes. Risk of
injury.
• Keep children away from the sealant.
Changing a wheel
Preparation
You must park the vehicle correctly before changing a tyre.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the car as far away from
the flow of traffic as possible on a flat surface.
– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
– Apply the handbrake firmly and engage a gear or put the selector
in the P position.
– Chock the wheel opposite the wheel being changed with a stone
or similar object.
– If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
– Remove the spare wheel and the vehicle tools from the luggage
compartment.
– All passengers should leave the car. They should wait in a safe
place (for instance behind the safety barrier).
WARNING
• If you have a puncture, stop the car well away from moving traffic.
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set the emergency triangle in
position. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
• All passengers should leave the car.
• Apply the handbrake firmly and engage a gear or put the gear selector
in the P position. Chock the wheel opposite the wheel being changed with
a stone or similar object.
• If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
• Only use jacks which have been approved for your vehicle by SEAT.
• Never use other jacks, even if they have been approved for use on other
SEAT models. The jack could slip. Risk of injury.
• Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. This may cause an
accident.
• Never place your body (e.g. arm or leg) underneath the vehicle if it is
only supported by the jack Risk of injury.
• If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable
stands additionally to support the vehicle - Risk of accident!.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 236 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 237
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Removing the hubcaps
The hubcaps must be removed to gain access to the wheel
bolts.
– Take the wire hook from the vehicle tool kit.
– Insert the hook into a hole in the cover ⇒ fig. 156.
– Pull off the cover.
Removing the caps from the wheel bolts
The caps must be removed from the wheel bolts before the
wheel bolts are unscrewed.
– Take the wire hook from the vehicle tool kit.
– Insert the hook through the opening in the middle of the cap
⇒ fig. 157.
– Use the wire hook to remove the caps.
The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be replaced after changing the
tyre.
When fitting, make sure that the caps click securely into place. They could
otherwise fall off.
Fig. 156 Removing the
hubcaps
Fig. 157 Use the hook to
pull off the cap
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 237 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when238
Loosening the wheel bolts
A special adapter is required to slacken the anti-theft wheel
bolts. It is contained in the vehicle tool kit.
Loosening wheel bolts
–Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt
⇒ fig. 158.
– Grip the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt one turn
anti-clockwise ⇒ .
Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts
– Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool
kit
45)
.
– Insert the adapter
45)
into the wheel bolt. Push it in as far as it will
go ⇒ fig. 159.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Grip the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt one turn
anti-clockwise ⇒ .
Loosening wheel bolts
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down
the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the car for support
and take care not to slip.
WARNING
• Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle
with the jack.
• For wheels with a bolted outer ring, the grooved wheel bolts should
never be loosened. This could cause leaks resulting in accident.
Fig. 158 Changing the
wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts
Fig. 159 Changing the
wheel: anti-theft wheel
bolts and adapter
45)
Optional equipment
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 238 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 239
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Raising the vehicle
Raise the vehicle using only the designated jacking points.
Do not raise the vehicle until you have slackened the wheel bolts on
the wheel you wish to remove ⇒ page 238.
Jacking up the vehicle
1. Look for the jacking point ⇒ fig. 160 (arrow) ⇒ closest to the
tyre which has to be changed.
2. Raise the jack under the jacking point until it just fits under the
car.
3. Check that the foot of the jack has full contact with the ground.
4. Adjust the jack and continue to crank the claw up until it is in
position around the vertical rib ⇒ fig. 161 (arrow) underneath
the vehicle ⇒ .
5. Crank the jack further until the wheel is just clear of the ground.
The jack may be applied only at the jacking points shown ⇒ fig. 160. The
front jacking point is approx. 11 cm from the wheel arch. The rear jacking
point is approx. 14 cm from the wheel arch. Notches on both sides in the sills
show where the jacking points are under the vehicle.
WARNING
• You could injure yourself or damage the vehicle if you do not observe
the correct jacking points.
• Soft ground under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
Always provide a firm base for the jack on the ground. If necessary use a
large, strong board or similar support. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
• The jack claw must grasp the vertical rib under the sill properly so that
the jack does not slip off when you are raising the vehicle ⇒ fig. 161.
Fig. 160 The jacking
points
Fig. 161 Jack at rear on
right
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 239 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when240
Note
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle should be used for turning
wheel bolts only. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
Changing a wheel
Removing the wheel
– Using the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle, unscrew
the slackened wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface.
– Take off the wheel.
– Store the defective wheel as described on ⇒ page 233.
Fitting the spare wheel
– Put the spare wheel in place.
– Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket.
– Lower the vehicle on the jack.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly using the box spanner. Do not
tighten the bolts in clockwise or anti-clockwise sequence.
Tighten them in diagonal sequence.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be mounted so that they rotate in the
correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always observe the direction of rotation
indicated when mounting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can
give maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount a wheel so it rotates in the wrong
direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads. To
benefit from the advantages of tyres with directional tread pattern, the tyre
should be replaced as soon as possible so that it rotates in the correct direc-
tion.
Caution
• The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Do not grease or oil them.
• The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle should be used for
turning wheel bolts only. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
After changing a wheel
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the spare wheel bracket
⇒ page 233.
– Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench ⇒ page 240.
– Check tyre pressure at the next opportunity.
– Avoid fast driving manoeuvres.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 240 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 241
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen
whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is
too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Caution
The stipulated torque for the wheel bolts on steel wheels and alloy wheels is
170 Nm with a tolerance of ± 10 Nm. You should visit a specialised workshop
as soon as possible to check the torque with a torque wrench.
Note
• The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Do not grease or oil them.
• The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle should be used only for
turning wheel bolts which have been slackened off. Do not use it to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
• If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before you have the tightening
torque checked.
• If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the car -
for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for a short
period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon
as possible.
• Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
– Use the fuse tables, to find out where, and in which fuse box, the
damaged fuse is located ⇒ page 242.
– Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
– Remove the fuse box cover ⇒ fig. 162.
– Use the plastic pliers in the fuse box to remove the fuse.
– If the fuse has blown (the metal strip will have melted), replace it
with a new fuse of the same amp rating (same colour and same
imprint) and size.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. It is advisable to carry
several spare fuses at all times.
Fig. 162 Left side of dash
panel fusebox
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 241 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when242
Colour coding of fuses
WARNING
Never “repair” damaged fuses and never replace them with higher rating
fuses. This could cause fires.
Note
• If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the elec-
trical system checked by a qualified dealership as soon as possible.
• If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
Fuse table
The table shows the fuse locations for the most important consumers. The
right-hand columns contain the insert location, the figures in brackets indi-
cate the Ampère rating for the fuse. One single consumer could have more
than one fuse.
Several consumers could run over one single fuse.
The fuse box has space for replacement fuses.
There are other fuses in the vehicle. These should be changed by a qualified
dealership.
Colour Amp rating
violet 3
light brown 5
brown 7,5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
transparent 25
green 30
Electrical consumer Symbol
Dipped headlights
Electrical socket for trailer -
Turn signals
Brake lights
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 242 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 243
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Main beam headlights
Rear window heater
Rear windscreen wiper
Horn
Interior lights
Electric windows
Usable electric windows
Fog lights
Rear fog light
Hazard warning light switch
Instrument panel lighting
Climate control
Heating
Radio, navigation system
/
Rear light -
Registration plate light
Electrical consumer Symbol
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 243 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when244
Windscreen washers
Windscreen washer system
Sliding sunroof
Seat heating
Mirror adjustment
Heating the exterior mirrors
Side lights
Socket (luggage compartment)
Central locking. -
Electrical consumer Symbol
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 244 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 245
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Changing a light
Bulbs, changing
Bulbs should be changed by a professional mechanic only.
Technical knowledge is required to change bulbs. This is because, in certain
cases, access can be gained only by removing other vehicle components.
This applies in particular to bulbs which can be accessed only from the
engine compartment.
We recommend bulbs are changed by a qualified dealership or, if this is not
possible, by a qualified person.
However, if you wish to change the bulb, please observe the following:
Before changing a bulb, you must switch off the light (light switch in O posi-
tion), and the turn signal lever must be in the neutral position.
Always replace damaged bulbs with identical bulbs with the same designa-
tion. The type is inscribed on the bulb, either on the glass or on the base.
You should store spare light bulbs in the vehicle for safety-relevant lights.
Bulbs can be obtained from SEAT Service Centres.
WARNING
• The high voltage element of gas discharge lamps must be handled
correctly. Failure to comply could result in fatal injuries.
• H7* bulbs are pressurised and could explode when they are being
changed. Risk of injury.
• In vehicles fitted with gas discharge lamps *, there is a mortal danger if
the high voltage section of the lamp is incorrectly handled.
• When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 209.
Side indicator lamps
– Slide the turn signal forwards ⇒ fig. 163 and remove .
– Remove the lamp holder and separate.
Fig. 163 Side indicator
Fig. 164 Side indicator
A
1
A
2
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 245 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when246
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Insert the lamp holder in the turn signal guide rail.
– First fit the turn signal in the opening of the chassis, securing
with the tabs ⇒ fig. 164 and then, fit the bulb as shown by
the arrow .
Rear lights
Before changing a bulb, the tailgate should always be opened.
The lights have the following layout:
On the body
Turn signals, pilot light and brake/rear light
On the tailgate / rear door
Reversing light and rear antifog light.
Lights on vehicle body
– Open the cover in the luggage compartment trim.
– Press the side tabs in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 165.
– Press the defective bulb into the bulb carrier, then turn it to the
left and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb and turn to the right as far as possible.
– Fit the lampholder, press in until the tabs “click” into place.
A
1
A
2
Fig. 165 Lights on
vehicle body
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 246 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 247
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Lights on tailgate
– Remove the cover in the trim.
– Press the elastic tab in the direction of the arrow ⇒ page 247,
fig. 166 and remove the lampholder downwards.
– Press the defective bulb into the bulb carrier, then turn it to the
left and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb and turn to the right as far as possible.
– Fit the lampholder in the corresponding opening at the front
tab and press the lampholder upwards at the back , until the
elastic tab engages ⇒ page 247, fig. 167.
– Replace the cover. To do so, insert the the two tabs of the exterior
part of the cover behind the tailgate trim and push the cover
upwards until it goes into position.
Registration plate light
Fig. 166 Lights on tail-
gate
Fig. 167 Lights on tail-
gate
A
1
A
2
Fig. 168 Registration
light
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 247 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when248
– Remove the glass
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Bolt down the glass without overtightening, ensuring that the
seal is perfectly fitted.
– Fit the reflector in the corresponding space in the tailgate
ensuring that the rubber seal and the light are assembled
correctly.
– Do not bolt down the glass too tightly.
Interior light
– Insert a fine screwdriver or similar between the casing and the
glass (arrow) ⇒ fig. 169 and carefully remove the glass.
– Replace the bulb.
– Replace the glass in the casing.
Fig. 169 Interior light
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 248 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 249
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Reading light
– Remove the complete bracket (interior light and reading light),
place the flat end of a screwdriver between the light and the
ceiling trim and turn the screwdriver.
– Turn the lampholder of the back of the lamp in the direction of
the arrow ⇒ fig. 170 and separate.
– Remove the defective lamp (with glass bulb).
–Fit a new lamp.
– Replace the mount in the casing and guide it towards the right as
far as possible.
– Replace the bracket, first on the left and then insert it in the
opening in the ceiling trim.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be
connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
documentation). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
• The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the vehicles elec-
trical system.
Fig. 170 Reading lights
Fig. 171 Reading lights
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 249 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when250
How to jump start: description
In ⇒ fig. 172, the flat battery is and the charged battery .
Jump lead terminal connections
– Switch off the ignition on both vehicles ⇒ .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive ⇒ fig. 172
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery ⇒ .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal
component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the
engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
connect it to a point near the battery ⇒ .
5. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the car with the flat battery and wait one or
two minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blower and rear window heater in the vehicle
with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are
generated when the leads are disconnected.
10. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse
order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
Fig. 172 How to connect
the jump leads
A
A
A
B
A
+
A
+
A
-
A
X
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 250 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 251
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
• Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine compartment”.
• The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat
battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
• Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger
of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
• Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
• Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the
negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could
be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
• Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
• The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
• Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 251 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when252
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting*
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable ⇒ page 249.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
–Engage the 2
nd
or the 3
rd
gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing eye at the front of the vehicle
The towline anchorage is located on the right of the front bumper ⇒ fig. 173.
To access the housing it is necessary to remove the cover.
Removing the cover of the front towing eye
- Remove the cover in the direction shown by the arrow ⇒ fig. 173 levering
it out with a screwdriver.
Assembling the cover of the front towing eye
- Put the cover into its socket and press until it is firmly in place.
- Check that it is correctly fitted.
The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Remember the instruc-
tions for tow starting or towing that are in the user's manual
Fig. 173 Towing eye at
the front of the vehicle
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 252 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 253
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Rear towline anchorage
On the right hand side of the lower rear section of the body, there is a fixed
towline anchorage ⇒ fig. 174 (arrow).
Towing bracket
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket, it should also be used for
towing other vehicles.
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable ⇒ page 250.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage 2nd or 3rd gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch on the ignition and switch on the hazard warning lights.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Note
• The legal requirements concerning towing should be observed.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
• For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
Fig. 174 Rear towline
anchorage
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 253 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when254
Notes for tow-starting or towing
If a cable is used for towing the vehicle, please observe the
following:
As the driver of the towing vehicle
– Switch on the hazard warning lights. However, observe any regu-
lations to the contrary.
– Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake earlier than you
would normally, but with a more gentle pressure on the brake.
As the driver of the vehicle being towed
– Switch on the hazard warning lights. However, observe any regu-
lations to the contrary.
– Place the gearstick in neutral or position N.
– Ensure that the tow-rope remains taut at all times.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
towing bracket.
Driving tips
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
enced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warning lights on and the ignition
switched on, the turn signal may be used to indicate that you are going to
change direction. Move the turn signal lever accordingly. Meanwhile, the
hazard warning lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the
rest position, the hazard warning lights will automatically reconnect.
The brake servo works only when the engine is running. In this case the pedal
has to be pressed harder.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
• Move the selector lever to N.
• Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
• Do not tow further than 50 km.
• If a breakdown truck is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 254 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when 255
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
WARNING
The braking behaviour and capacity of a vehicle changes when being towed
or when you are trying to start the vehicle by pulling. Please observe the
following notes in order to prevent injury and accident:
• Inexperienced drivers should refrain from trying in order to avoid acci-
dent.
• Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
− The brake must be depressed must harder as the brake servo does
not operate. Take care not to bump into the towing vehicle.
− More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power
steering does not operate when the engine is switched off.
• Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
− Accelerate smoothly and avoid any sudden movement.
− Brake more in advance than usual and brake gently.
Caution
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it
⇒ page 252.
Note
• Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
• For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
• If, due to a breakdown, the gearbox does not have lubricant, the vehicle
should be towed with the drive wheels suspended.
• If it is necessary to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox for more than
50 km, it should be towed by qualified personnel and with the drive wheels
suspended.
Lifting the vehicle
Vehicle lifting points
Fig. 175 Lifting with the
lifting platform: lifting
point at front left
Fig. 176 Lifting with the
lifting platform: lifting
point at rear left
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 255 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
If and when256
Your vehicle may only be lifted by a lifting platform at the points shown in the
illustrations ⇒ page 255, fig. 175 and ⇒ page 255, fig. 176 ⇒ .
Using the jack to lift the vehicle ⇒ page 239.
To prevent damage to the underside of the vehicle when lifting the vehicle,
rubber pads must be used.
Before driving onto a lifting platform, you must check there is sufficient clear-
ance between low parts of the vehicle and the lifting platform.
WARNING
If the lifting platform is inappropriate or the vehicle is lifted incorrectly,
accidents or injuries may be caused. The vehicle could even fall from the
lifting platform.
• All occupants should leave the vehicle before it is lifted.
• The vehicle must only be lifted at the points indicated in the diagrams
⇒ page 255, fig. 175 and ⇒ page 255, fig. 176. If the vehicle is not lifted
at the indicated points, it may fall from the platform while the engine or
gearbox is being dismounted, for example.
• Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Risk of accident. The
vehicle may fall from the platform due to the engine vibrations.
• When work is being carried out underneath the vehicle, it must be
secured using suitable frames. If not, an accident may occur.
• To lift the vehicle, only two-pillar or two-post lifting platforms with
sufficiently long arms and load-bearing capacity should be used.
• Lifting platforms with fluid filled cushions may not be used for lifting
the vehicle.
Caution
• The vehicle should never be lifted at the engine oil sump, the gearbox, or
the front or rear axle. This could cause serious damage to the vehicle.
• Before driving onto a lifting platform, you must check there is sufficient
clearance between low parts of the vehicle and the lifting platform.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 256 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
General notes on the technical data 257
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
What you should be aware of
General notes
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.
All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain.
The vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule
in the vehicles registration documents show which engine is installed in the
vehicle.
The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted, for different
models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 257 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
General notes on the technical data258
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the
luggage compartment.
The following information can be found in the vehicle information:
• Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
• Vehicle type / engine power / gearbox type
• Engine and gearbox code / paint number / interior equipment
• Optional extras / PR numbers
This information also figures in the Maintenance Program.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 258 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
General notes on the technical data 259
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
How are the figures measured?
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption, CO
2
emissions and actual kerb weight of the vehicle
are noted on the vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the weight
category of the car, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
istic test method based on normal everyday driving.
The following test conditions are applied:
Note
• Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi-
tion of the vehicle.
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.
Extra urban cycle
In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The
road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined
The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban
cycle.
CO
2
emissions
The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is then
analysed to evaluate the CO
2
content and other emissions.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 259 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
General notes on the technical data260
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒ .
WARNING
• Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions
and requirements.
• Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data ⇒ .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
of the towing bracket must not exceed 85 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
• For safety reasons, you should not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when
towing a trailer. This also applies to countries where higher speeds are
permitted.
• Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If
the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced. ⇒
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 260 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
General notes on the technical data 261
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒ . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
• Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure
is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an
increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
• If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the
vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high,
the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 261 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data262
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do
so may cause serious damage to the engine.
Engine oil dipstick
Oil filler neck
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)
Coolant temperature deposit
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the
components mentioned above. These operations are described in the
⇒ page 209.
Overview
Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are
contained as of ⇒ page 257.
Fig. 177 Diagram for the
location of the various
elements
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 262 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 263
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 2.0l 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gear
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 5200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 170/ 2600-4200
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 10,5 ± 0,5
Fuel
Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 177
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 10,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15,2
Urban cycle 12,8/302
Extra urban cycle 7,4/172
Combined 9,4/223
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 263 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data264
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 85 kW (115 hp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2430
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1653/1973
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1210
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 980
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1800
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.0 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 5200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 170/ 2600-4200
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1984
Compression 10
Fuel
Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 264 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 265
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 173
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 11,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 17,2
Urban cycle 14,2/339
Extra urban cycle 8,1/195
Combined 10,4/250
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2450
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1673/1993
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1800
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.0 litres
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 265 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data266
Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 bhp) 6 gear
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 5800
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/ 1800-4300
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1781
Compression 9,5 ± 0,5
Fuel
95 super RON
a)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
Maximum speed in km/h 199
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,9
Urban cycle 13,0/318
Extra urban cycle 7,4/178
Combined 9,4/225
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 266 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 267
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8l 110 kW (150 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2450
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1674/1994
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1900
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 5500
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/ 1850-4500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/ 1780
Compression 9,5
Fuel
95 super RON
a)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 267 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data268
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 195
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,1
Urban cycle 14,1/337
Extra urban cycle 8,2/197
Combined 10,3/247
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2480
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1707/2005 1707/2027
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1900
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 268 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 269
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Petrol engine 2.8l VR6150 kW (204 bhp) 6 gear
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 150 (204)/6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 265/3400
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
6/ 2792
Compression 10,75 ± 0,25
Fuel
Super 98 RON
a)
/Super 95 RON
b)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 217
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,9
Urban cycle 14,5/348
Extra urban cycle 8,2/198
Combined 10,5/252
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 269 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data270
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.8l VR6 150 kW (204 bhp) Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2470
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1694/2014
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 150 (204)/6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 265/3400
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
6/ 2792
Compression 10,75 ± 0,25
Fuel
Super 98 RON
a)
/Super 95 RON
b)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 270 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 271
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 217
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,4
Urban cycle 16,2/388
Extra urban cycle 8,6/207
Combined 11,4/274
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2500
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1727/2020 1727/2025
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 litres
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 271 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data272
Petrol engine 2.8l VR6150 kW (204 bhp) 6 gear four-wheel drive
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 150 (204)/6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 265/3400
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
6/ 2792
Compression 10,75 ± 0,25
Fuel
Super 98 RON
a)
/Super 95 RON
b)
a)
Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 214
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,3
Urban cycle 14,9/357
Extra urban cycle 8,7/210
Combined 11,0/265
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 272 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 273
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears four-wheel drive
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1786/2047 1786/2084
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1330
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 5.5 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 18
Fuel
Petrol min. 51 CN
a)
or Biodiesel 5 % as in EN 14214
a)
Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 273 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data274
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 178
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14,7
Urban cycle 9,1/240
Extra urban cycle 5,9/156
Combined 7,1/188
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1784
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1260
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1330
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 274 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 275
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 85 kW (115 bhp) 6 gears
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 18 ± 0,5
Fuel
Petrol min. 51 CN
a)
or Biodiesel 5 % as in EN 14214
a)
Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 181
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,7
Urban cycle 8,0/211
Extra urban cycle 5,6/148
Combined 6,5/172
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 275 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data276
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 85 kW (115 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1724/ 2003
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1896
Compression 18 ± 0,5
Fuel
Petrol min. 51 CN
a)
or Biodiesel 5 % as in EN 14214
a)
Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 276 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 277
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 177
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15,1
Urban cycle 10,0,0/264
Extra urban cycle 5,9/156
Combined 7,4/196
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1757/2032 1757/2020
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 277 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data278
Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km) without DPF
46)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103(140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900-2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel
Petrol min. 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 192
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,2
46)
Diesel particulate filters
Urban cycle 8,3/219 8,5/225
Extra urban cycle 5,7/151 5,7/151
Combined 6,6/175 6,7/177
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 278 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 279
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) 6 gears. Ecomotive
Engine specifications
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1740/2024
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1240
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103(140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/1900-2500
No. of cylinders, capacity
in cm
3
4/1968
Compression 18,5 ± 0,5
Fuel
Petrol min. 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 279 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data280
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 195
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.9
Urban cycle 7,8/206
Extra urban cycle 4,9/130
Combined 6/159
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2510
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1740
Front gross axle weight in kg 1240
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1280
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes, gradients up to 12% 700
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 280 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Technical Data 281
Safety First Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance Technical Data
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4,634 mm/ 4,739 mm 1,810 mm/ 1,816 mm
Height at kerb weight 1,707 mm/ 1,820 mm
Front and rear projection 892 mm/ 907 mm
Wheelbase 2,835 mm
Turning circle 11.93 m
Track width
a)
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front Rear
1,532 mm 1,518 mm
1,520 mm 1,506 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 70 l. Reserve 8 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3.5 l/ 6 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 281 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 282 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index 283
Index
4MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Additional instruction manual
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adjust seats
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjusting lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Air conditioning manual
faults in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air conditioning system
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air recirculation mode
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Airbag cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Airbags
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Anti-lock brake system
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Anti-locking brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Sealing and inflating tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ashtrays
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Automatic car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 163
Automatic gearbox with Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . 172
Automatic mode
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Automatic wipe
Windscreen wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 116
automatic wipe
Rear window wiper and wash . . . . . . . . . . . 117
AUX-IN Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Battery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29
Belt retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Belt tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 283 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index284
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Belt tensioner
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Brake pad wear
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Brake pad wear indicator*
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 185
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 185
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Breakdown set
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Bulb defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Car phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
CD changer
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
individual opening of doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Central stowage on instrument panel . . . . . . . 133
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Changing a light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 240
Changing brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Changing bulbs
lights on tailgate/rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Lights on vehicle body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Registration plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Changing the bulbs
interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Changing the lamps
Side indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 224
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
in front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 193
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cleaning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cleaning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Air outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 284 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index 285
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Second cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Coming Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Cool box
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 217
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Coolant level
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Coolant temperature
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cooling and heating box
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Notes on usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Correct adjustment of front head restraints . . . . 12
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D
Daylight driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Deadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Diagram of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Diesel engine particulate filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Diesel particulate filter
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Disabling airbag
front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Disabling front and side passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disabling frontal airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Display
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Door open display
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 92
Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Economically / With Respect for the
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 192
With four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . 109, 110
E
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
EDS
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Electric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 149
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 285 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index286
Electric windows
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
one-touch closing and opening . . . . . . . . . 102
roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Electrical accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Electrical windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 74
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 183
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Emergency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 209
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Engine fault
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Engine hood
See Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Engine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Engine oil temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 187
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 182
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Exhaust gas indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 196
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 144
Fastening seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fault in the exhaust system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Faults in operation of air conditioning . . . . . . 158
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Replacing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Front passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Front seats
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fuel level
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
See also Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
G
G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 286 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index 287
Gear selector lever
See Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
See Automatic gearbox with Tiptronic . . . . 172
General overview of the engine compartment . 262
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Guide lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
H
Hand brake
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 173
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Headlamp washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Heated rear window
Heating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Hubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Illumination of instruments and switches . . . . 109
Indicator lights
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Individual opening of doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Instrument lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Adjusting belt routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Cleaning the child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fastening harness belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Releasing harness belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Interior monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Intermittent wipe
rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
K
Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Key with remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Kick-down function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
L
Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Lighting of controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Load compartment
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Loading area
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 143
See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . 14, 143
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 287 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index288
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Manual mode
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
N
Navigation system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
On board computer with multifunction display*
Check working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Message on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
One-touch closing and opening
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
P
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 174
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Passenger compartment
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Preheating system
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
R
Raising the vehicle with the vehicle tool kit jack . .
239
Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rear door
driving with the tailgate open . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rear seats
characteristics of seat equipment . . . . . . . 126
moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Remote control key
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Replacing the battery
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Replacing tyres
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Retractor
See Automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 288 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index 289
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Reverse gear
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Risk of front passenger seat airbag for a rear facing
child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
RME fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149
saving fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Running in
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
S
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Safety notes
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disabling front and side passenger airbag . 44
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Saving fuel
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Detachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
one buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
With two buckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Seat layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Folding backrest forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Lifting seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Securing load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sliding/tilting sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 261
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Spare wheel
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Starting
a petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 289 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index290
Starting the engine
after the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 165
With the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Steam cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 160
Stowage
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Stowage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sun visor
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sunroof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Switches
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Switching off the engine
With the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
T
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tailgate open display*
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tank
Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20
Thermos box
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 260
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Towline anchorage
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 253
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Trailer turn signals
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 112
Two-way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 225
U
Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Unfastening seat belt
(with one buckle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Unfastening seat belts
(with two buckles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Upper right stowage on instrument panel . . . 134
V
Vehicle
Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Vehicle paint
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 290 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
Index 291
Vehicle tool kit jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 144
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
W
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
warning lamp
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
exhaust gas indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 195
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 218
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Wheel bolt caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 261
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 260
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 32
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
12
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 19
Why wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Opening and closing electrically . . . . . . . . 101
Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Windscreen wipers
Changing the front blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 209
alhambra_ingles_0708 Seite 291 Mittwoch, 10. September 2008 10:55 10
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
;
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.08
Portada ALHAMBRA_interior.qxd 10/9/08 11:59 Página 3
ALHAMBRA
owner’s manual
Inglés S91551ABA20 (07.08) (GT9)
auto emoción
Alhambra Inglés (07.08)
auto emoción
S91551ABA20
Portada ALHAMBRA.qxd 10/9/08 12:18 Página 3
